Honda CR-V 2008 Owner Manual

Honda CR-V 2008 Owner Manual
07/07/25
14:32:58
31SWA610
0002
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda CR-V was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
i
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:33:02
31SWA610
0003
Main Menu
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These
devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure
of any airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else
except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.
ii
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:33:13
31SWA610
0004
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
and one of
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iii
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:33:17
31SWA610
0005
Main Menu
Important Handling Information
Your CR-V has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 244 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 268 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
iv
2008 CR- V
2008 CR-V Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii
Important Handling Information .................................................................................................................... iv
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, information display, dashboard, and steering column) .............. 57
Features (climate control,audio,,steering wheel,security and cruise control) ................................................... 125
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break- in, and cargo loading) ..................................................................... 225
Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 243
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 271
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ...................................... 311
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 333
Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 349
Authorized Manuals (U. S. only) (how to order) ......................................................................................... 353
Index ............................................................................................................................... ........................................ I
Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)
00X31-SWA-6100
1
07/07/25
14:33:43
31SWA610
0007
Main Menu
Overview of Contents
Contents
A convenient reference to the
sections in this manual.
Your Vehicle at a Glance
A quick reference to the main
controls in your vehicle.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important information about the
proper use and care of your vehicle’s
seat belts, an overview of the
supplemental restraint system, and
valuable information on how to
protect children with child restraints.
Instruments and Controls
Explains the purpose of each
instrument panel indicator and gauge,
and how to use the controls on the
dashboard and steering column.
Features
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
Before Driving
What gasoline to use, how to breakin your new vehicle, and how to load
luggage and other cargo.
Driving
The proper way to start the engine,
shift the transmission, and park; plus
what you need to know if you’re
planning to tow a trailer.
Maintenance
The maintenance minder shows you
when you need to take your vehicle
to the dealer for maintenance service.
There is also a list of things to check
and instructions on how to check
them.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers several problems
motorists sometimes experience,
and details how to handle them.
Technical Information
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
2
2008 CR- V
Warranty and Customer
Relations
(U.S. and Canada only)
A summary of the warranties
covering your new vehicle, and how
to contact us for any reason. Refer to
your warranty manual for detailed
information.
Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
How to order manuals and other
technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of the information you
need when you pull up to the fuel
pump.
07/07/25
14:33:51
31SWA610
0008
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.59)
GAUGES (P.66)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.139)
MIRROR CONTROL
(P.112)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG (P.9, 25)
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.9, 25)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCHES
(P.82)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS*
(P.126)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM*
(P.131)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.109)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.247)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.227)
U.S. EX-L without navigation system is shown.
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.229)
ACCESSORY POWER
SOCKETS
(P.120)
* : If equipped
3
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:33:59
31SWA610
0009
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS (P.76)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON (P.76)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR (P.32)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS*2
(P.216)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.170)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM
ON/OFF SWITCH
(P.257)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.73)
MIRROR CONTROLS (P.112)
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON/
HEATED MIRRORS
BUTTON*2 (P.77/112)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS
(P.78)
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
(P.78)
AUDIO SYSTEM (P.139)
CLOCK (P.219)
HORN*1
SHIFT LEVER
(P.247)
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES*3
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS (P.222)
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
Refer to the navigation system manual.
4
2008 CR- V
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES*2
(P.108)
07/07/25
14:34:03
31SWA610
0010
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13
5. Fasten and Position the
Seat Belts .............................. 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 15
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Additional Information About
Your Seat Belts ........................ 18
Seat Belt System Components ... 18
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 20
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 22
Airbag System Components ....... 22
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 25
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28
How Your Side Curtain
Airbags Work ........................... 30
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 31
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 31
How the Passenger Airbag
Off Indicator Works ................ 32
Airbag Service .............................. 33
Additional Safety Precautions .... 33
Protecting Children − General
Guidelines ................................. 34
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 34
All Children Should Sit in a
Back Seat .................................. 35
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 35
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 37
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 37
Additional Safety Precautions .... 37
Protecting Infants and Small
Children .................................... 39
Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 41
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
With LATCH ................................ 43
With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 46
With a Tether ............................... 48
Protecting Larger Children ............ 50
Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 50
Using a Booster Seat ................... 51
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front .......................................... 52
Additional Safety Precautions .... 53
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54
Safety Labels .................................... 55
5
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
07/07/25
14:34:12
Main Menu
31SWA610
0011
Table Of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page 14 ).
Restrain All Children
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
small children should be restrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages 34 − 53 ).
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
6
2008 CR- V
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page 273 ).
07/07/25
14:34:19
Main Menu
31SWA610
0012
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
(3) (4)
(10) (1)
(9)
(7)
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(5)
(8)
(11)
(12)
(2)
(6)
(2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(12) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and always wear
your seat belts. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
can take an active role in protecting
yourself and your passengers.
7
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(9)
07/07/25
14:34:31
Main Menu
31SWA610
0013
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
8
2008 CR- V
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What You Should Do:
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
07/07/25
14:34:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0014
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
25 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page 28 for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page 30 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
CONTINUED
9
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:34:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0015
Table Of Contents
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
10
2008 CR- V
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
07/07/25
14:34:56
Main Menu
31SWA610
0016
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
See pages 34 − 53 for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate monitor on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
specific door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Driver and Passenger Safety
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page 82 for how to lock the
doors, and page 63 for how the door
and tailgate open monitor works.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
Your vehicle has the auto door
locking/unlocking feature. For more
information, see page 83 .
CONTINUED
11
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:35:05
Main Menu
31SWA610
0017
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down, and in
and out (see page 78 ).
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
On vehicles with manual adjustable
seats
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page 94 for how to adjust a
front seat (power adjustment) and
page 95 for a manual adjustment.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seatbacks should also adjust their seatback to a comfortable, upright
position.
12
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:35:14
Main Menu
31SWA610
0018
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page 95 for how to adjust the
manual adjustable seat-back, and
page 94 for the power adjustable
seat-back.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the center of the back of your head
rests against the center of the
restraint.
Have passengers adjust their head
restraints properly as well. Taller
persons should adjust their restraint
as high as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 98 for how to adjust the
head restraints and how the driver’s
and front passenger’s active head
restraints work.
13
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
07/07/25
14:35:22
Main Menu
31SWA610
0019
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
The seat belt in the center position
of the back seat can be unlatched
and retracted to allow the back seat
to be folded up or down. This seat
belt should be latched whenever the
seat-back is in an upright position.
See page 107 for how to unlatch and
relatch the seat belt.
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
14
2008 CR- V
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
07/07/25
14:35:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0020
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
RELEASE BUTTONS
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
See page 18 for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
CONTINUED
15
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
very serious injuries in a crash.
6.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and head restraints, and
put on their seat belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
upright, well back in their seats, with
their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
07/07/25
14:35:37
Main Menu
31SWA610
0021
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
16
2008 CR- V
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
07/07/25
14:35:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0022
Table Of Contents
Protecting Adults and Teens
Additional Safety Precautions
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
17
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. If they do, they
07/07/25
14:35:53
Main Menu
31SWA610
0023
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages 27 and 28 ).
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
18
2008 CR- V
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s), such as a foldeddown back seat, that are touching
the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
07/07/25
14:36:02
Main Menu
31SWA610
0024
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
DETACHABLE SEAT BELT
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat (see page 46 ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seating position on the rear seat is
equipped with a detachable seat belt
that has two parts: a small latch plate
and an anchor buckle.
The detachable seat belt should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable seat belt, see page 107 .
19
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lap/Shoulder Belt
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
07/07/25
14:36:11
Main Menu
31SWA610
0025
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over (see page
30 ).
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
20
2008 CR- V
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
297 ). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your Honda
Warranty Information booklet for
details.
07/07/25
14:36:16
Main Menu
31SWA610
0026
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
21
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:36:21
Main Menu
31SWA610
0027
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
(12)
(1)
(2)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit/Rollover Sensor
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensor Unit/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(12) SRS Indicator
(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners
22
2008 CR- V
(7)
(5)
(9)
(6)
(4)
(13)
07/07/25
14:36:27
Main Menu
31SWA610
0028
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Your airbag system includes:
(14)
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 28 ).
(15)
(14) Front Crash Sensors
(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)
(16) Side Curtain Airbags
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
30 ).
CONTINUED
23
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 25 ).
(16)
07/07/25
14:36:37
Main Menu
31SWA610
0029
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page 20 ).
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 27 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and the front
passenger’s seat belt are latched
or unlatched (see page 18 ).
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and signal the control
unit to turn the airbag off (see
page 29 ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
27 ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page 31 ).
24
2008 CR- V
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page 30 ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page 31 ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page 32 ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
07/07/25
14:36:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0030
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 27 ).
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
CONTINUED
25
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:36:53
Main Menu
31SWA610
0031
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Stage Airbags
Dual-Threshold Airbags
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
Your front airbags are also dualthreshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
In a more severe crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a less severe crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
26
2008 CR- V
If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
07/07/25
14:37:03
Main Menu
31SWA610
0032
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Advanced Airbags
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any objects or metal items
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSORS
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
CONTINUED
27
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbagcaused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
07/07/25
14:37:12
Main Menu
31SWA610
0033
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page 32 ).
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the affected side.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly, do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
This includes:
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
28
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:37:20
Main Menu
31SWA610
0034
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, if the
position sensors detect a child has
leaned into the side airbag’s
deployment path, the airbag will shut
off.
The side airbag may also shut off if a
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page 31 ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
29
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
07/07/25
14:37:27
Main Menu
31SWA610
0035
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
In a Rollover
If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it signals
the control unit, which immediately
deploys both side curtain airbags and
activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
In a Side Impact
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
30
2008 CR- V
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
07/07/25
14:37:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0036
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
How the Side
Airbag Off
Indicator Works
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
U.S.
Canada
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off (see page 61 ). If it doesn’t come
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
31
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the SRS Indicator
Works
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
potential problem with your airbags
or seat belt tensioners.
07/07/25
14:37:47
Main Menu
31SWA610
0037
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S.
Canada
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
32
2008 CR- V
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object(s) hanging on the seat
or in the seat-back pocket.
Any object(s), such as a foldeddown back seat, that are touching
the rear of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
07/07/25
14:37:56
Main Menu
31SWA610
0038
Table Of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Any
seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact. Even if your
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid. If water or
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during a crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
another liquid soaks into a seatback, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting
your dealer. Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
33
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbag Service
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
07/07/25
14:38:04
Main Menu
31SWA610
0039
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children aged 12 and
under.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle (see pages 39 − 49 ).
34
2008 CR- V
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly (see pages 50 − 53 ).
07/07/25
14:38:13
Main Menu
31SWA610
0040
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 31 ),
please follow these guidelines:
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page 50 for important
information about protecting larger
children).
CONTINUED
35
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children aged 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
07/07/25
14:38:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0041
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models
SUN VISORS
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
36
2008 CR- V
DASHBOARD
07/07/25
14:38:37
Main Menu
31SWA610
0042
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page 50 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 95 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
14 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual contact,
we strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Additional Safety Precautions
Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
CONTINUED
37
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
07/07/25
14:38:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0043
Table Of Contents
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked. If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages 46 and 47 for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors. This can prevent
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle. Leaving children without
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
For example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
children from accidentally falling
out (see page 88 ).
38
2008 CR- V
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
07/07/25
14:38:53
Main Menu
31SWA610
0044
Table Of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
Child Seat Type
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
39
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
07/07/25
14:39:01
Main Menu
31SWA610
0045
Table Of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Placement
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat until the child
reaches the weight or height limit
for the seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
40
2008 CR- V
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
07/07/25
14:39:10
Main Menu
31SWA610
0046
Table Of Contents
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into each rear seating
position in the back seat.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCHcompatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forwardfacing for small children.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
CONTINUED
41
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
Even with advanced front airbags
that automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 32 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
07/07/25
14:39:18
Main Menu
31SWA610
0047
Table Of Contents
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle. All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
42
2008 CR- V
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rearfacing child seats.
07/07/25
14:39:28
Main Menu
31SWA610
0048
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
The five lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
BUTTON
LOWER ANCHORS FOR
CENTER LATCH
Using the Outer LATCH
Driver and Passenger Safety
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the rear seats to
secure a child seat in any seating
position: one in each outer seating
position, or one in the center.
LOWER ANCHORS FOR OUTER LATCH
When you install a child seat in the
rear center seating position, use the
center lower anchors as shown in the
illustration. To install a child seat in
either outer seating position, use the
outer lower anchors. You can install
up to two child seats at a time using
the outer lower anchors.
Do not attach two child seat
connectors to a single lower anchor
at a time.
OUTER LOWER ANCHORS
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in either of the rear outer seats:
1. Store the seat belt buckle or
tongue in the storage pockets.
2. Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
43
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:39:37
Main Menu
31SWA610
0049
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Rigid type
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats have
a rigid-type connector as shown
above.
Flexible type
Other LATCH-compatible seats have
a flexible-type connector as shown
above.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
5. Remove the head restraint (see
page 98 ). Make sure the removed
head restraint is secured in the
cargo area.
Reinstall the head restraint when the
child seat is removed.
6. If equipped
Remove the dual deck cargo shelf
(see page 114 ).
44
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:39:48
Main Menu
31SWA610
0050
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
TETHER
ANCHOR
Using the Center LATCH
TETHER ANCHOR
TETHER ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
CENTER LOWER ANCHORS
8. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
9. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
10. Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf.
COVER
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat in the rear center seating
position, use the center lower
anchors as shown above.
1. Follow step 1 through 5 as
described previously to secure the
child seat.
2. Pull down the cover to access the
tether anchor.
TETHER STRAP HOOK
3. Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the tether anchor in
the ceiling, making sure the strap
is not twisted. Tighten the strap
according to the seat maker’s
instructions.
4. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
45
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
7. Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the tether strap is not twisted.
07/07/25
14:39:55
Main Menu
31SWA610
0051
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
rear seat, make sure the detachable
seat belt anchor is securely latched
(see page 107 ).
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
46
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:40:01
Main Menu
31SWA610
0052
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
47
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
07/07/25
14:40:11
Main Menu
31SWA610
0053
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat.
Using an Outer Anchor
ANCHOR
ANCHOR
Each rear outside seating position
has an anchorage point on the seatback, and the center seating position
has an anchorage point in the ceiling
near the tailgate.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
TETHER STRAP HOOK
1. On vehicles with the dual deck
cargo shelf, remove it (see page
114 ).
3. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
2. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 46 ), remove the
head restraint, then route the
tether strap over the seat-back.
Make sure to store the removed
head restraint in the cargo area
and to reinstall it when the child
seat is removed.
4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
48
2008 CR- V
5. Reinstall the dual deck cargo shelf.
07/07/25
14:40:19
Main Menu
31SWA610
0054
Table Of Contents
Installing a Child Seat
Using the Center Anchor
ANCHOR
1. Remove the rear center head
restraint, and store it in the cargo
area.
2. After properly securing the child
seat (see page 46 ), open the
anchor cover.
Driver and Passenger Safety
COVER
ANCHOR
TETHER STRAP HOOK
3. Route the tether strap over the
seat-back, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the tether strap is not twisted.
4. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
49
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:40:25
Main Menu
31SWA610
0055
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
50
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:40:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0056
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
3. Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Using a Booster Seat
5. Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
41 ) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
A child who has outgrown a forwardfacing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
CONTINUED
51
2008 CR- V
Driver and Passenger Safety
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
07/07/25
14:40:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0057
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
aged 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages 14 and 50 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
52
2008 CR- V
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Supervise the child. Even a mature
child sometimes needs to be
reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
07/07/25
14:40:50
Main Menu
31SWA610
0058
Table Of Contents
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
Driver and Passenger Safety
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt. Devices intended to
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
53
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:40:58
Main Menu
31SWA610
0059
Table Of Contents
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
54
2008 CR- V
With the tailgate open, airflow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system as shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system as follows:
1. Select the fresh air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Turn the fan on high speed.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
07/07/25
14:41:14
Main Menu
31SWA610
0060
Table Of Contents
Safety Labels
SUN VISOR
U.S. models
Canadian models
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
Driver and Passenger Safety
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
SUN VISOR
U.S. models only
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
RADIATOR CAP
CONTINUED
55
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:41:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0061
Table Of Contents
Safety Labels
HOOD
DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF
U.S. models
U.S. models
Canadian models
Canadian models*
*Symbols
on labels
attached to your vehicle are to
remind you to read this owner’s
manual for proper and safe
operation of your vehicle.
DOORJAMBS
U.S. models
56
2008 CR- V
Canadian models
07/07/25
14:41:34
31SWA610
0062
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
Door Locks ....................................... 82
Power Door Locks ....................... 82
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking.. 83
Childproof Door Locks ............... 88
Remote Transmitter ........................ 89
Tailgate ............................................. 92
Seats .................................................. 94
Seat Heaters ................................... 108
Power Windows ............................. 109
Moonroof ........................................ 110
Mirrors ............................................ 111
Interior Convenience Items .......... 113
Dual Deck Cargo Shelf ............. 114
Beverage Holders ...................... 116
Center Table .............................. 117
Lower Glove Box ....................... 117
Upper Glove Box ....................... 118
Vanity Mirror ............................. 118
Sun Visor .................................... 119
Sunglasses Holder ..................... 119
Conversation Mirror ................. 120
Accessory Power Sockets......... 120
Console Compartment .............. 121
Coat Hook ................................... 122
Seat Under Tray ........................ 122
Interior Lights ................................ 122
57
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations ............................ 58
Instrument Panel ............................. 59
Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 60
Gauges .............................................. 66
Trip Meter .................................... 67
Current Fuel Mileage .................. 68
Average Fuel Mileage ................. 68
Range ............................................ 68
Odometer ...................................... 69
Fuel Gauge ................................... 69
Temperature Gauge .................... 69
Outside Temperature
Indicator ................................... 69
Check Fuel Cap Message ........... 71
Maintenance Minder ................... 71
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ............................................ 72
Windshield Wipers and Washers .. 73
Turn Signals and Headlights .......... 74
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76
Hazard Warning Button .................. 76
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
Parking Brake .................................. 78
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 78
Keys and Locks ................................ 79
Immobilizer System......................... 80
Ignition Switch ................................. 81
07/07/25
14:41:41
Main Menu
31SWA610
0063
Table Of Contents
Control Locations
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.82)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.112)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS (P.59)
GAUGES (P.66)
MOONROOF SWITCH*
(P.110)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.32)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON (P.76)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.139)
CLOCK
(P.219)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.109)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(P.247)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
(P.227)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.229)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS*
(P.126)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM*
(P.131)
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
(P.78)
SEAT HEATER
SWITCHES*
(P.108)
EX-L without navigation system is shown
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS (P.120)
* : If equipped
58
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:41:50
Main Menu
31SWA610
0064
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR (P.62)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.325)
HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
(P.63)
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
(P.63)
LOW OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.60, 324)
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.60, 324)
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR (P.63)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.61)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.62)
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.60)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.61)
SIDE AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR*
(P.61)
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.64)
PARKING BRAKE
AND BRAKE
SYSTEM
INDICATOR*
(P.60, 326)
SECURITY
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.65, 220)
DOOR AND
TAILGATE
OPEN
MONITOR
(P.63)
IMMOBILIZER TPMS
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.64)
INDICATOR
(P.61)
* : The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
59
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
(P.65)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.62)
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
(P.62)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.64)
07/07/25
14:42:01
Main Menu
31SWA610
0065
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many
indicators that give you important
information about your vehicle.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 325 .
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page 324 .
Charging System
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page 324 .
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator
This indicator has two functions:
1. It comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
2. If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 326 .
60
2008 CR- V
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
07/07/25
14:42:11
Main Menu
31SWA610
0066
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page 18 .
Canada
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page 31 .
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,
and the engine’s fuel system will be
disabled (see page 80 ).
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the ABS.
If this happens, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer. With the
indicator on, your vehicle still has
normal braking ability but no antilock. For more information, see page
254 .
61
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
cutoff system, side curtain airbags,
automatic seat belt tensioners,
driver’s seat position sensor, or the
front passenger’s weight sensors.
For more information, see page 31 .
U.S.
07/07/25
14:42:22
Main Menu
31SWA610
0067
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position.
If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
256 for more information on the
VSA system.
VSA Activation Indicator
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
Cruise Control Indicator
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
222 for information on operating the
cruise control.
Cruise Main Indicator
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 256 ).
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. See page 256 for more
information on the VSA system.
62
2008 CR- V
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page 222 ).
07/07/25
14:42:32
Main Menu
31SWA610
0068
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
High Beam Indicator
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page 75 .
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page 75 ).
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator
If this indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position and release the parking
brake, it means there is a problem
with the DRL. There may also be a
problem with the high beam
headlights. Have your vehicle
checked by your dealer.
Low Fuel Indicator
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 2.3 US gal (8.6 ) of fuel
remaining in the tank before the
reading reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the reading does reach E.
Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
The appropriate indicator comes on
in this display if the tailgate or any
door is not closed tightly.
63
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page 293 ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
07/07/25
14:42:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0069
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are significantly low
on pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure, and determine
the cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page 312 ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 332 ). For more
information, see page 258 .
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
64
2008 CR- V
Lights On Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or
position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
07/07/25
14:42:49
Main Menu
31SWA610
0070
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Indicators
Washer Level Indicator
Security System Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Instruments and Controls
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It
reminds you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. The maintenance main
items and sub items will be displayed
in the information display. See page
273 for more information on the
maintenance minder.
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
Canadian models only
If equipped
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page 286 ).
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. See page
220 for more information on the
security system.
65
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:42:54
Main Menu
31SWA610
0071
Table Of Contents
Gauges
INFORMATION DISPLAY
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
TACHOMETER
CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE
SPEEDOMETER
ODOMETER/AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE/
CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE
TRIP METER
U.S. model is shown.
FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
66
2008 CR- V
SELECT/RESET KNOB
07/07/25
14:43:02
Main Menu
31SWA610
0072
Table Of Contents
Gauges
Trip Meter
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the last
selection is displayed.
The information display consists of
three segments. The upper segment
displays current fuel mileage, the
second segment displays the
odometer, average fuel mileage,
range (estimated distance), engine
oil life, and the lower segment
displays the trip meter, and
maintenance item code(s).
To switch the display, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly. When you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position the last selection is
displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
67
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the select/reset
knob repeatedly.
07/07/25
14:43:10
Main Menu
31SWA610
0073
Table Of Contents
Gauges
Current Fuel Mileage
Current Fuel Mileage
Average Fuel Mileage
When either of the trip meters (trip
A or B) is displayed, your vehicle’s
average fuel mileage since you last
reset that trip meter can be shown
on the information display (mpg on
U.S. models and l/100 km on
Canadian models). This number is
updated once per 10 seconds. To see
the average fuel mileage, press and
release the select/reset knob
repeatedly.
U.S. model is shown
This display shows the current, or
instant fuel mileage you are getting.
When you reset a trip meter, the
average fuel mileage for that trip
meter also resets.
It shows the number of mpg (U.S.)
or l/100 km (Canada).
68
2008 CR- V
Range (Estimated Distance)
This display shows the estimated
distance you can travel on the fuel
remaining in the tank.
This distance is estimated from the
fuel economy you have achieved
over the last few miles (kilometers),
so it will vary with changes in speed,
traffic condition, etc.
07/07/25
14:43:20
Main Menu
31SWA610
0074
Table Of Contents
Gauges
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount.
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the reading should be in
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the reading may reach near
the red mark. If it reaches the red
(Hot) mark, pull safely to the side of
the road. See page 322 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
Outside Temperature Indicator
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
If equipped
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models).
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
CONTINUED
69
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Odometer
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
07/07/25
14:43:27
Main Menu
31SWA610
0075
Table Of Contents
Gauges
When it reaches the desired value,
push the select/reset knob to enter
the setting. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
To adjust the outside temperature
display, press and hold the select/
reset knob for 10 seconds. The
display changes as shown above.
Select the outside temperature
indicator by turning the select/reset
knob. The display begins to blink.
Push the same knob to enter this
setting, then turn it to adjust the
temperature. The following
sequence will appear for each: 0, 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.)
or 0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
70
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:43:32
Main Menu
31SWA610
0076
Table Of Contents
Gauges
Maintenance Minder
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued troublefree driving. Refer to page 273 for
more information.
Instruments and Controls
Check Fuel Cap Message
If your fuel fill cap is loose or
missing, a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’
message appears on the information
display after you start the engine.
For more information, see page 228 .
71
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:43:40
Main Menu
31SWA610
0077
Table Of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.74)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS (P.76)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS (P.73)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM ON/OFF
SWITCH
(P.257)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.32)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
(P.76)
SHIFT LEVER
(P.247)
MIRROR CONTROL (P.112)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
BUTTON (P.77)
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON*2
(P.112)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS*2
(P.216)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENTS
(P.78)
HORN*1
CRUISE CONTROL BUTTON
(P.222)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P.120)
VOICE CONTROLS*3
*1 :
*2 :
*3 :
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL (P.78)
To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.
If equipped.
Refer to the navigation system manual.
72
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:43:50
Main Menu
31SWA610
0078
Table Of Contents
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
OFF − The wipers are not activated.
INT − The wipers operate every
few seconds. At low speed and high
speed, the wipers run continuously.
ADJUSTMENT RING
1. MIST
2. OFF
3. INT − Intermittent
4. LO − Low speed
5. HI − High speed
6. Windshield washers
On all models except LX
The length of the wiper interval is
varied automatically according to the
vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the
adjustment ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay (
position), the
wipers change to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20km/h).
LO − The wipers run at low speed.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
73
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washers − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
07/07/25
14:44:00
Main Menu
31SWA610
0079
Table Of Contents
Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
4. Rotate the switch
counterclockwise also to spray the
window washer and turn the wiper
on.
Turn Signal and Headlights
When you shift the transmission to
the reverse position with the front
windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically even if
the rear wiper switch is off.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid reservoir as the windshield washer.
1. OFF
When you turn the wiper switch to
the ‘‘OFF’’ position, the wiper will
return to its parked position.
2. Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
The wiper operates every 7
seconds after completing two
sweeps.
3. Hold past ON to activate the rear
window wiper a few times and to
spray the rear window washer.
1. Turn Signal
2. OFF
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlights on
5. High Beams
6. Flash high beams
74
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:44:08
Main Menu
31SWA610
0080
Table Of Contents
Turn Signals and Headlights
Headlights − Turning the switch to
the ‘‘
’’ position turns on the
parking lights, taillights, instrument
panel lights, side-marker lights, and
rear license plate light.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘
’’
position turns on the headlights. If
you leave the lights on with the key
removed from the ignition switch,
you will hear a reminder chime when
you open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
High Beams − Push the lever
forward and the high beam indicator
will come on (see page 63 ). Pull it
back to return to low beams.
Daytime Running Lights
With the headlight switch in the off
or
position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
75
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal − Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
07/07/25
14:44:16
Main Menu
31SWA610
0081
Table Of Contents
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
Instrument Panel Brightness
Hazard Warning Button
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
You can change the instrument panel
brightness only when the light
switch is on.
Turn the knob on the lower part of
the instrument panel to adjust the
brightness.
You will hear a beep when maximum
or minimum brightness is reached.
To reduce glare at night, the
instrument panel illumination dims
when you turn the light switch to
or
. Turning the select/
reset knob fully to the right until you
hear a beep will cancel the reduced
brightness.
76
2008 CR- V
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
07/07/25
14:44:23
Main Menu
31SWA610
0082
Table Of Contents
Rear Window Defogger
On vehicles with automatic air
conditioning system
The defogger will shut itself off
within about 10 to 30 minutes
according to the outside temperature.
Instruments and Controls
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Manual A/C type is shown.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator in
the button comes on to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition switch. You
have to turn the defogger on again
when you restart the vehicle.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
If equipped
Pushing this button also turns the
mirror heaters on or off. For more
information, see page 112 .
77
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:44:31
Main Menu
31SWA610
0083
Table Of Contents
Parking Brake, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Parking Brake
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page 60 ).
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out, so it points
toward your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
78
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:44:40
Main Menu
31SWA610
0084
Table Of Contents
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
Keys and Locks
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
MASTER KEY
WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET
KEY
(Gray)
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Instruments and Controls
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
LEVER
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
You should have received a key
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
The valet key does not contain a
battery. Do not try to take it apart.
79
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:44:48
31SWA610
Main Menu
0085
Table Of Contents
Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on
briefly, then go off. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position, remove the key,
reinsert it, and turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position again.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start your engine, contact your
dealer.
Always take the ignition key with you
whenever you leave the vehicle alone.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
80
2008 CR- V
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
07/07/25
14:44:56
Main Menu
31SWA610
0086
Table Of Contents
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
81
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
07/07/25
14:45:04
Main Menu
31SWA610
0087
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in the driver’s door lock. To
unlock only the driver’s door, insert
the key, turn the key, and release it.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you turn the key a
second time within a few seconds.
Power Door Locks
Lock
Lock
Unlock
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all doors and the tailgate,
push the top of the master door lock
switch on either front door, pull the
lock tab rearward on the driver’s
door, or use the key on the outside
lock on the driver’s door.
Unlock
RED INDICATOR
The lock tab on any passenger’s door
locks and unlocks that door.
When the door is unlocked, you can
see the red indicator on the lock tab
above the inner door handle.
Pushing the bottom of the either
master door lock switch will unlock
all doors and the tailgate. Pushing
forward the lock tab on the driver’s
doors unlocks only that door.
82
2008 CR- V
To lock any passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, pull the
lock tab rearward and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch, pull the
lock tab rearward or push the top of
the master switch, then close the
door.
07/07/25
14:45:12
Main Menu
31SWA610
0088
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle has customizable
settings for the doors and tailgate to
automatically lock and unlock. There
are default settings for each of these
features. You can turn off or change
the settings for these features as
described on the following pages.
When you customize the setting,
make sure your vehicle is parked
safely, the engine is off, and apply
the parking brake. Make all settings
before you start driving.
Auto Door Locking
The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The auto door locking is
deactivated all the time.
The doors and the tailgate lock
whenever you move the shift lever
out of the Park (P) position.
The doors and the tailgate lock
when the vehicle speed reaches
9 mph (15 km/h).
This is the factory setting.
83
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
With any door and the tailgate open
and the key in the ignition, locking
with master door lock switches is
disabled. The lock tab on the driver’s
door is not disabled if the driver’s
door is closed. Pulling the driver’s
lock tab rearward will lock all doors
and the tailgate. If you try to lock an
open driver’s door by pulling the lock
tab rearward, the lock tab on the
driver’s door pops out and unlocks
the driver’s door.
07/07/25
14:45:21
Main Menu
31SWA610
0089
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Door Lock
modes:
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door until you hear a click
(after about 5 seconds).
To program the Park Lock mode:
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
shift lever is moved out of the Park (P)
position.
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
84
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:45:31
Main Menu
31SWA610
0090
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
To program the Drive Lock mode:
Locks all doors and tailgate when the
vehicle’s speed reaches about 9 mph
(15 km/h).
3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
and move the shift lever out of the
Park (P) position.
4. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
5. Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
85
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
3. Push and hold the front of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Keep holding the switch until you
hear another click (after about 5
seconds).
07/07/25
14:45:42
Main Menu
31SWA610
0091
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
Auto Door Unlocking
The auto door unlocking feature has
five possible settings:
To turn off the Auto Door Unlock
modes:
The auto door unlocking is
deactivated all the time.
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
The driver’s door unlocks when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position.
This is the default setting.
All doors and tailgate unlock when
you move the shift lever to the
Park (P) position.
The driver’s door unlocks
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click,
and after about 5 seconds, you will
hear another click.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and open the driver’s
door.
All doors and tailgate unlock
whenever you turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I)
position.
86
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:45:53
Main Menu
31SWA610
0092
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
To program the Park Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the shift lever is
moved to Park (P) position.
3. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold down the switch:
To program the Ignition Switch
Unlock mode:
Unlocks the driver’s door or all doors
and tailgate when the ignition switch is
moved out of the ON (II) position.
Instruments and Controls
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
feature,
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
4. Release the switch, and within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK (0) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and make sure to
close the driver’s door.
CONTINUED
87
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:46:01
Main Menu
31SWA610
0093
Table Of Contents
Door Locks
3. Push and hold the brake pedal,
then move the shift lever out of
the Park (P) position.
4. Push and hold the rear of the
master door lock switch on the
driver’s door. You will hear a click.
Continue to hold down the switch:
5. Release the switch and, within 5
seconds, turn the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Move the shift lever to the Park
(P) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Until you hear another click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate driver’s door unlock
Childproof Door Locks
LEVER
Unlock
Lock
feature,
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position (lever is
down), the door cannot be opened
from the inside regardless of the
position of the lock tab. To open the
door, push the lock tab forward and
use the outside door handle.
Or, until you hear two more
clicks (after about 10 seconds)
to activate all doors and tailgate
unlock feature.
88
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:46:09
Main Menu
31SWA610
0094
Table Of Contents
Remote Transmitter
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK − Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior lights will flash once. When
you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the doors and the tailgate
are locked and the security system
(if equipped) has set. You cannot
lock the doors and the tailgate if any
door or the tailgate is not fully closed
or the key is in the ignition switch.
The ceiling light and the spot light (if
equipped) comes on when you press
the UNLOCK button if the lights are
in the door activated position. If you
do not open any door or the tailgate
within 30 seconds, the light fades out.
If you relock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
before 30 seconds have elapsed, the
light(s) will go off immediately.
PANIC − Press this button for
about 2 seconds to attract attention:
the horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If you do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, they will
automatically relock, and the
security system (if equipped) will
reset.
CONTINUED
89
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
UNLOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK − Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the remaining doors
and the tailgate. Some exterior lights
will flash twice each time you press
the button.
07/07/25
14:46:17
Main Menu
31SWA610
0095
Table Of Contents
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors
and the tailgate, replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
SCREW
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
90
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:46:25
Main Menu
31SWA610
0096
Table Of Contents
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the + side facing down.
BATTERY
TAB
5. Install the parts in reverse order.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
2. Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
91
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations
for battery disposal.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
07/07/25
14:46:31
Main Menu
31SWA610
0097
Table Of Contents
Tailgate
The tailgate will lock when you lock
the driver’s door with the key, the
remote transmitter, the master door
lock switch, or the lock tab on the
driver’s door.
HANDLE
RELEASE
To unlock the tailgate, turn the key
clockwise twice, push the rear of the
master door lock switch, or push the
UNLOCK twice on the remote
transmitter.
To open the tailgate, push the
release, and lift up. To close the
tailgate, use the tailgate handle to
lower it, then press down on the
back edge.
92
2008 CR- V
Keep the tailgate closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas
from getting into the interior. See
Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page
54 .
07/07/25
14:46:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0098
Table Of Contents
Tailgate
Unlocking the Tailgate
RELEASE LEVER
Place a cloth on the top side of the
cover, then use a small flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the cover on
the back of the tailgate.
Instruments and Controls
If the power door lock system cannot
unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
Push the release lever to the lower
right as shown.
If you need to unlock the tailgate
manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
93
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:46:49
Main Menu
31SWA610
0099
Table Of Contents
Seats
Moves the whole seat up
and forward, or down
and backward. The front
of the seat also tilts up or
down at the same time.
EX-L model only
Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments
See pages 17 − 18 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
The controls for the power
adjustable driver’s seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving.
The front passenger’s seat can be
adjusted manually (see the next
page).
Moves the seat forward
and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down.
Raises or lowers the seat.
94
2008 CR- V
Increases or decreases
the lumbar support.
07/07/25
14:46:59
Main Menu
31SWA610
0100
Table Of Contents
Seats
Seat Adjustments
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seatbacks.
move the seat to make sure it is
locked in position.
REAR SEAT
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
FRONT SEAT
To adjust the front or rear seat
forward or backward, pull up on the
bar under the seat cushion’s front
edge. Move the seat to the desired
position, and release the bar. Try to
Once a seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
The angle of each rear seat-back can
be adjusted separately. To change
the seat-back angle of the rear seatback, pull up on the release lever on
the top of the seat-back. Move the
seat-back to the desired position,
then release the lever. Make sure
the seat-back latches in the new
position.
CONTINUED
95
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
07/07/25
14:47:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0101
Table Of Contents
Seats
When using the center seating
position, adjust the left and right side
of the rear seats to the same position.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment
Armrests
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seatbacks after you adjust the rear seats.
FRONT
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
96
2008 CR- V
Each front seat has an armrest on
the side of the seat-back. To use it,
pivot it down.
07/07/25
14:47:13
Main Menu
31SWA610
0102
Table Of Contents
Seats
Cargo Pass-through
For more information of the dual
deck cargo shelf, see page 114 .
REAR
The rear seat armrest is in the
center of the rear seat. Pivot it down
to use it.
The rear center seat-back has a
cargo area pass-through. To use the
cargo area pass-through, pull up the
release on top of the center seatback and fold it down.
97
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
If your vehicle is equipped with a
dual deck cargo shelf, do not use the
shelf when any seat-back is folded
down. Objects placed on this shelf
can be thrown forward and
occupants can be injured during
sudden stops or a collision.
07/07/25
14:47:20
Main Menu
31SWA610
0103
Table Of Contents
Seats
Head Restraints
Front Position
See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about
improperly positioning head restraints.
CUSHION
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the center of the back
of the occupant’s head rests against
the center of the restraint.
98
2008 CR- V
RELEASE BUTTON
Adjusting the Head Restraint
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust a
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
07/07/25
14:47:29
Main Menu
31SWA610
0104
Table Of Contents
Seats
Rear Outer Position
CUSHION
Rear Center
CUSHION
Failure to reinstall the head
restraints can result in severe
injury during a crash.
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
RELEASE BUTTON
Removing the Head Restraint
To remove a head restraint, pull it up
as far as it will go. Push the release
button, then pull the restraint out of
the seat-back.
LEGS
SEAT-BACK
RELEASE BUTTON
When a passenger is seated in the
rear center seating position, make
sure the center head restraint is
properly adjusted.
Make sure the removed head
restraints are securely stored.
When reinstalling a head restraint,
put the legs back in place. Then
adjust it to the appropriate height
while pressing the release button.
Make sure the head restraint locks
in position when you reinstall it.
99
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.
07/07/25
14:47:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0105
Table Of Contents
Seats
Active Head Restraints
against whiplash and injuries to the
neck and upper spine.
For a head restraint system to work
properly:
After a collision, the activated
restraint should return to its normal
position.
Do not hang any items on the head
restraints, or from the restraint
legs.
If the restraints do not return to their
normal position, or in the event of a
severe collision, have the vehicle
inspected by a Honda dealer.
Do not place any object between
an occupant and the seat-back.
Install each restraint in its proper
location.
Only use genuine Honda
replacement head restraints.
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats have active head restraints. If
the vehicle is struck severely from
the rear, the occupant properly
secured with the seat belt will be
pushed against the seat-back and the
head restraint will automatically
move forward.
This reduces the distance between
the restraint and the occupant’s head.
It also helps protect the occupants
100
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:47:48
Main Menu
31SWA610
0106
Table Of Contents
Seats
EX-L model only
SLIDE BAR
SEAT-BACK ANGLE
ADJUSTMENT LEVER
The seat-back of the power
adjustable driver’s seat cannot be
level. Do not push the seat-back
down forcibly.
4. Adjust the rear seat-back to the
desired position.
You can recline the seat-backs on the
front seats so they are level with the
rear seat cushions, making a large
cushioned area. To do this:
EX-L model only
1. Adjust the rear seats as far back
as possible.
2. Remove the front head restraints
(see page 98 ), and store them
securely.
Reverse this procedure to return the
front and rear seats to the upright
position. Make sure you install the
head restraints and securely lock the
seats before driving.
When you return the seat-back to its
upright position, hold the seat-back
to keep it from going up too quickly.
Only the passenger’s side can be
level as follows.
101
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
3. Adjust the front seats forward as
far as possible. Pull up the seatback angle adjustment lever and
pivot the seat-back backward until
it is level with the rear seat
cushion.
Reclining the Front Seats
07/07/25
14:47:56
Main Menu
31SWA610
0107
Table Of Contents
Seats
Folding the Rear Seats Down
Each rear seat-back can be folded
down separately to give more cargo
room. With either of the outer seatbacks folded-down, you can still
carry a passenger in the rear seat.
With the center seat-back foldeddown, either outer seating position
can be used.
You can also fold up the left or right
side of the rear seats separately to
create further cargo space (see page
105 ).
BUCKLE
LATCH PLATE
1. Push the seat belt buckles into the
seat cushion.
Remove any items from the seat
before folding down the seat-back.
When you are folding the rear center
seat-back, use the latch plate to
release the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor (see page 107 ).
Allow the seat belt to retract into the
holder on the ceiling and store the
buckles in it.
Make sure the rear seat armrest is
stored.
102
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:48:03
Main Menu
31SWA610
0108
Table Of Contents
Seats
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat-back to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is secured and
the seat belt is in front of the seatback before driving.
RELEASE LEVER
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
their lowest position.
3. Pull up the release lever on the top
of the seat-back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded down.
CONTINUED
103
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
In the rear center seating position,
be sure the detachable anchor is
latched securely (see page 107 ).
Make sure that the folded down rear
seat does not interfere with the front
passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors and the front passenger’s
seat belt reminder indicator to work
improperly (see pages 18 and 32 ).
Also check the passenger airbag off
indicator to assure proper operation
of the passenger’s front airbag.
07/07/25
14:48:11
Main Menu
31SWA610
0109
Table Of Contents
Seats
When any seat-back is folded down,
do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
(if equipped).
Folding the Rear Seat Forward
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 236 ).
2. Follow steps 1 through 4 on page
102 for folding down the seatback.
Lower the center seat-back before
folding the passenger’s side seat
forward.
SLIDE BAR
The left and right rear seats can be
folded up separately to make room
for cargo.
Remove any items from the seat
before you fold up the seat cushion.
To fold the rear seat forward:
1. Pull up the bar under the seat
cushion and slide the rear seat
backward. The rear seat will not
fold forward unless it is as far
back as it will go.
104
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:48:20
Main Menu
31SWA610
0110
Table Of Contents
Seats
ANCHOR
FASTENING STRAP
ANCHOR
FASTENING
STRAP
LOCK RELEASE STRAP
3. Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release strap
under the seat cushion’s back
edge, then lift the rear of the seat.
You cannot fold up the rear seat if
it is not latched securely in the
rearmost position.
4. Pull out the fastening strap from
the slit on the seat-back. Then
attach the anchor on the fastening
strap to the hook on the center
pillar.
HOOK
5. Pull down on the anchor to engage
the upper part of the anchor
securely on the hook, and make
sure the seat is secure.
CONTINUED
105
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
HOOK
07/07/25
14:48:27
Main Menu
31SWA610
0111
Table Of Contents
Seats
Make sure that the folded up right
rear seat does not interfere with the
front passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors and the front passenger’s
seat belt reminder indicator to work
improperly (see page 32 ). Also
check the passenger airbag off
indicator to assure proper operation
of the passenger’s advanced front
airbag.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to the upright position.
Make sure the seat is securely
latched before driving.
When you are not using the
fastening strap, store the strap into
the slit on the seat-back.
Make sure both outer seat belts are
positioned in side of the rear seatbacks.
Detachable Anchor
The seat belt in the rear center seat
is equipped with a detachable anchor.
In the center seating position of the
rear seat, be sure the detachable
anchor is latched securely before
using the seat belt (see page 107 ).
This allows the center seat belt to be
unlatched when the rear center seat
back is folded down or the right side
rear seat is folded forward.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 236 ).
Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
(if equipped) when the seats are
folded down or forward.
106
2008 CR- V
Using the seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable
anchor is correctly latched.
07/07/25
14:48:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0112
Table Of Contents
Seats
ANCHOR BUCKLE
SMALL LATCH PLATE
LATCH PLATE
Pull out the small latch plate and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle
when reattaching the belt and buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched. Make sure the seat belt is
not twisted.
LATCH PLATE
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
insert the latch plate into the slot on
the side of the anchor buckle. Store
the detachable anchor and seat belt
latch plates in the retractor housing.
107
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
TRIANGLE
MARKS
07/07/25
14:48:43
Main Menu
31SWA610
0113
Table Of Contents
Seat Heaters
In the LO setting, the heater runs
continuously. It does not cycle with
temperature changes.
Passenger’s
seat
Follow these precautions when using
the seat heaters:
HEATERS
Driver’s
seat
If equipped
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The passenger seat
only has heaters in the seat bottom
because of the side airbag cutoff
system.
DRIVER’S SEAT
HEATER SWITCH
PASSENGER’S
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH
The ignition switch must be in the
ON (II) position to use the heaters.
Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
In the HI setting, the heater turns off
when the seat gets warm, and turns
back on after the seat’s temperature
drops.
108
2008 CR- V
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
07/07/25
14:48:51
Main Menu
31SWA610
0114
Table Of Contents
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
MAIN SWITCH
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want to stop the
window. To close the window, pull
back on the switch and hold it.
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
AUTO − To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go up
or down all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
When you push the MAIN switch in,
the switch is off, and the passenger
windows cannot be raised or lowered.
To cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
NOTE: Only on the driver’s window,
the auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the
switch.
109
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
07/07/25
14:48:59
Main Menu
31SWA610
0115
Table Of Contents
Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH
OPEN
TILT
CLOSE
To tilt up the moonroof, push on the
center of the moonroof switch. To
stop the moonroof from tilting up
fully, push the switch briefly.
To open the moonroof, pull back on
the switch and hold it. Release the
switch when the moonroof reaches
the desired position. To close the
moonroof, push the switch forward
and hold it. Release the switch to
stop the operation.
AUTO − To open the moonroof
fully, pull back the moonroof switch
firmly, then release it. The moonroof
automatically opens all the way. To
stop the moonroof from opening,
push the switch briefly.
To close the moonroof fully, firmly
push the moonroof switch forward,
then release it. The moonroof
automatically closes all the way. To
stop the moonroof from closing,
push the switch briefly.
If equipped
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch on
the front ceiling to operate the
moonroof. You must turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position to operate the moonroof.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
110
2008 CR- V
To open or close the moonroof
partially, lightly pull the switch back
or push it forward and hold it. The
moonroof will stop when you release
the switch.
07/07/25
14:49:07
Main Menu
31SWA610
0116
Table Of Contents
Moonroof, Mirrors
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed. You
should always check that all
passengers and objects are away
from the moonroof before closing it.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either front door. You must
then turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position for the moonroof to
operate.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or its
motor.
Mirrors
TAB
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
CONTINUED
111
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
AUTO REVERSE − If the
moonroof runs into any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it
will reverse direction and then stop.
To close the moonroof, remove the
obstacle, then use the moonroof
switch again.
07/07/25
14:49:15
Main Menu
31SWA610
0117
Table Of Contents
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
Power Mirror Heaters
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
If equipped
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off. Pressing this button also
turns the rear window defogger on
and off.
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
112
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:49:20
Main Menu
31SWA610
0118
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
COAT HOOK
DOOR BEVERAGE HOLDER
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
CONVERSATION MIRROR
SUN VISOR
VANITY MIRROR
DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF*1
BEVERAGE HOLDERS in
REAR SEAT ARMREST
CENTER CONSOLE with
BEVERAGE HOLDERS*2
AUXILIARY INPUT
JACK*3
SEAT UNDER TRAY*1
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET*2
*1 : If equipped
*2 : On some models, this is on the center table
*3 : This is on the center table or on the front panel, depending on models
LOWER GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
113
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
UPPER GLOVE BOX
07/07/25
14:49:28
Main Menu
31SWA610
0119
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Dual Deck Cargo Shelf
If equipped
The dual deck cargo shelf will
separate the storage area into two
storage areas. On the upper area,
you can store small and light items.
You should place heavy items in the
lower storage area. You can remove
the dual deck cargo shelf and store it
on the cargo floor to make a larger
cargo area.
cargo shelf fully opened and securely
latched.
To remove the dual deck cargo shelf,
fold up the rear half of the shelf
forward onto the front half, push up
on both sides, then pull it toward you.
Make sure to use the dual deck
114
2008 CR- V
To store the dual deck cargo shelf,
lift up either side of it, then move it
as shown above.
Place the dual deck cargo shelf on
the far side of the cargo floor, then
slide it forward while folding out the
upper half of the shelf.
07/07/25
14:49:35
Main Menu
31SWA610
0120
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Do not use this shelf if the
second row seats are folded
down.
The dual deck cargo shelf can be
placed on the floor as shown above.
Reverse this procedure to return the
dual deck cargo shelf to the upper
position. Make sure the dual deck
cargo shelf is latched securely.
When any of the rear seats are
folded down or forward, do not place
any objects on the dual deck cargo
shelf. Make sure to store the shelf
on the cargo area floor. It could be
unlatched during a crash.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 236 ).
CONTINUED
115
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
Objects placed on the shelf
could be thrown forward during
a crash or sudden stop and hurt
someone.
The maximum load on the dual deck
cargo shelf is 20 lbs on U.S. models,
and 10kg on canadian models. This
is shown on a label on the driver’s
side of the dual deck cargo shelf
(see page 56 ). To prevent damage
to the dual deck cargo shelf, do not
exceed the maximum load.
07/07/25
14:49:43
Main Menu
31SWA610
0121
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
On vehicles with rear seat armrest
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.
On U.S. models
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 20 lbs (9 kg) on this shelf.
On Canadian models
To prevent damage, do not place
more than 10 kg on this shelf.
116
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:49:52
Main Menu
31SWA610
0122
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Center Table
Lower Glove Box
On LX and EX models
To use the center table, pull up the
outside edge of the table until it
latches. To store it, pull the lever and
lower the table.
Sitting on or getting under the table,
or putting heavy objects on the table,
may damage or deform it.
Do not put any items on the table
while driving. They may fall down or
fly around when you go around
corners or brake hard.
Open the lower glove box by pulling
the bottom of the handle. Close it
with a firm push. Lock or unlock the
glove box with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
CONTINUED
117
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
To lock
07/07/25
14:49:58
Main Menu
31SWA610
0123
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Upper Glove Box
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Vanity Mirror
EDGE
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
LEVER
Open the upper glove box by
pushing up the lever. Close it by
pulling down on the edge under the
lever.
118
2008 CR- V
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
07/07/25
14:50:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0124
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Sun Visor
Sunglasses Holder
Push
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
When using the sun visor for the
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Instruments and Controls
SUN VISOR
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push
then release the raised detent. It will
unlatch and swing down. To close it,
push it until it latches. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
119
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:50:15
Main Menu
31SWA610
0125
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Conversation Mirror
Accessory Power Sockets
FRONT
EX model
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
Your vehicle has two or three
accessory power sockets depending
on the model.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
To switch back to the sunglasses
holder, close the conversation mirror
and then open the sunglasses holder.
120
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:50:22
Main Menu
31SWA610
0126
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Console Compartment
REAR
Instruments and Controls
Push
EX-L model
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Make sure to put the socket cover
back in place to prevent any small
foreign objects getting into the
socket.
If equipped
Push the release knob to open or
close the console compartment, slide
the lid rearward.
121
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:50:31
Main Menu
31SWA610
0127
Table Of Contents
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
Coat Hook
Seat Under Tray
Ceiling Light
ON
OFF
DOOR ACTIVATED
To use a coat hook, slide it out
slightly, then pull it down.
Make sure the coat hook is folded up
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
If equipped
Your vehicle has a seat under tray
located under the front passenger
seat. Use the tray by pulling on the
front center edge of the tray.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated, and
OFF. In the Door Activated (center)
position, the light comes on when
you:
Open any door.
Unlock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or remote transmitter.
122
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:50:40
Main Menu
31SWA610
0128
Table Of Contents
Interior Lights
After all doors and the tailgate are
closed tightly, the light fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave any door or the tailgate
open without the key in the ignition
switch, the ceiling light goes off after
3 minutes.
Courtesy light
Courtesy light
Push
Push
LX model
Push
Push
Turn on the spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
EX, EX-L models
The spotlights (with the switch in
the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
key or the remote transmitter, and
when you remove the key from the
ignition switch.
123
2008 CR- V
Instruments and Controls
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door and
the tailgate, the light fades out in
about 30 seconds.
Spotlights
The spotlights have a two-position
switch. In the DOOR position, the
lights come on when you open any
door. In the OFF position, the lights
do not come on.
07/07/25
14:50:46
Main Menu
31SWA610
0129
Table Of Contents
Interior Lights
Courtesy Light
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the select/reset
knob on the instrument panel.
Ignition Switch Light
The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door. It
fades out in about 30 seconds after
the door is closed.
Cargo Area Light
ON
OFF
TAILGATE ACTIVATED
The cargo area light has a threeposition switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
124
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:50:52
31SWA610
0130
Main Menu
Features
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
EX and EX-L models without navigation
system
Playing the AM/FM Radio ............153
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 157
Playing Discs ...................................162
Disc Player Error Messages .........169
AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 211
Protecting Your Discs ................... 213
Remote Audio Controls................. 216
Radio Theft Protection.................. 218
Setting the Clock ........................... 219
Security System ............................. 220
Rearview Camera and Monitor .... 221
Cruise Control ................................ 222
EX-L Models with navigation system
Playing the AM/FM Radio ............170
Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 176
Playing a disc ...................................182
Disc Player Error Messages ........ 190
CD Changer.....................................191
CD Changer Error Messages ...... 197
Playing a PC card ............................198
PC card Error Messages .............. 210
Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 126
Climate Control System ................ 131
Dual Temperature Control ........... 136
Climate Control Sensors ............... 138
Audio System ................................. 139
125
2008 CR- V
Features
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
LX model
Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 141
Playing a Disc ..................................145
Disc Player Error Messages .........152
07/07/25
14:50:56
Main Menu
31SWA610
0131
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
LX and EX models
FAN CONTROL DIAL
MODE CONTROL BUTTONS
MAX A/C BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
* : Canadian models
126
2008 CR- V
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED
MIRRORS BUTTON*
07/07/25
14:51:13
Main Menu
31SWA610
0132
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Fan Control Dial
Turn this dial to increase or decrease
the fan speed and airflow.
Temperature Control Dial
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
MAX A/C Button
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard. Pressing the
, A/C,
or any of the mode buttons cancels
MAX A/C.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Rear Window Defogger
Button
/
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 77 ).
Canadian models only
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Mode Control
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
CONTINUED
127
2008 CR- V
Features
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator in the button is on when
the A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
07/07/25
14:51:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0133
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode from
or
to
, the system
keeps the A/C on. The A/C
indicator will not come on if it was
off to start with.
To turn off the A/C, press the A/C
button to illuminate the indicator,
then press it again to turn off the
A/C.
When you switch to
or
mode from
, the A/C
turns off. But if it was on to start
with, the A/C stays on.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select
or
,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
You cannot turn the A/C off in this
mode.
Ventilation
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then discharges
it through vents near the tailgate.
1. Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
2. Make sure the A/C is off.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and defroster vents at
the base of the windshield.
128
2008 CR- V
Using the Heater
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
.
1. Select
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode. If you switch the mode
from
or
, the system
also automatically turns on the
A/C. This helps prevent the
windows from fogging up
unintendedly. The A/C indicator
will not come on if it was off to
start with (see the first column on
this page).
2. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
07/07/25
14:51:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0134
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the A/C
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
69 ). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
2. Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects
, and
switches to recirculation mode.
3. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Dehumidify the Interior
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Turn on the air conditioning.
and fresh air mode.
3. Select
4. Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
129
2008 CR- V
Features
1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
.
3. Select
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm, you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
air conditioning, and setting the fan
to maximum speed in fresh air mode.
07/07/25
14:51:51
Main Menu
31SWA610
0135
Table Of Contents
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Defog and Defrost
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
. The system
2. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was off to start with.
3. Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
/
to help
4. Select
clear the rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
When you switch to
, from
or
, the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button twice. The indicator in the
button comes on and then goes off.
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
The A/C indicator does not come
on if it was off to start with.
.
2. Select
3. Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
130
2008 CR- V
To Turn Everything Off
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
07/07/25
14:51:56
Main Menu
31SWA610
0136
Table Of Contents
Climate Control System
EX-L model
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AUTO
OFF
BUTTON BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BAR
MODE BUTTON
Features
DUAL BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER/MIRRORS
HEATER BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER BUTTON
131
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:52:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0137
Table Of Contents
Climate Control System
Voice Control System
On vehicles with navigation system
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and airflow levels.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Set the desired temperature by
turning the driver’s side
temperature control dial. You will
see AUTO and the selected
temperature in the display. You
can also set the passenger’s side
temperature by turning the
passenger’s side dial.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
132
2008 CR- V
Temperature Control
The driver’s side temperature and
the passenger’s side temperature can
be set separately. Turn the dial of
the appropriate temperature control
clockwise to increase the
temperature of airflow. Turn the dial
counterclockwise to decrease it.
Each set temperature is shown in the
display.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (
) or its upper limit
(
), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
When the indicator in the dual
button is on, the driver’s side and
passenger’s side temperature can be
controlled independently (see page
136 ).
07/07/25
14:52:15
Main Menu
31SWA610
0138
Table Of Contents
Climate Control System
Dual Button
To Turn Everything Off
If you press the OFF button, the
climate control system shuts off
completely.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Fan Control
Select the fan speed by pressing
either side of the fan speed control
bar ( ▲ or ▼ ). The fan speed is
shown in vertical bars on the display.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control dial below the
outside temperature.
133
2008 CR- V
Features
You can set the temperatures for the
driver’s side and the passenger’s side
separately when this button is
pressed (indicator is on). When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
the temperatures for both sides are
synchronized to the driver’s side set
temperature. When defrost mode is
selected, dual mode operation is
canceled.
07/07/25
14:52:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0139
Table Of Contents
Climate Control System
Recirculation Button
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
climate control system are at the
base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
The system should be left in fresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
Rear Window Defogger
Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 77 ).
Pushing this button also turns the
power mirror heaters on and off.
Mode Control
Use the mode control button to
select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
134
2008 CR- V
Airflow is divided between
the floor and corner vents and the
defroster vents at the base of the
windshield.
Windshield Defroster Button
This button directs the main airflow
to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
mode selection you may have made.
When you select
, the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase airflow to the windshield by
closing the corner vents on the
dashboard. To close the vents, rotate
the wheel under each corner vent.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
07/07/25
14:52:35
Main Menu
31SWA610
0140
Table Of Contents
Climate Control System
Features
. The system
1. Select
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
2. Adjust the temperature with the
driver’s side temperature control
so the airflow feels warm.
to help clear the
3. Select
rear window.
4. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
For faster defogging, manually set
the fan speed to high.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
135
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:52:40
Main Menu
31SWA610
0141
Table Of Contents
Dual Temperature Control
EX-L model only
The temperatures of the driver’s side
and the front passenger’s side can be
controlled independently when the
indicator in the DUAL button is on.
To adjust the driver’s side, turn the
driver’s side temperature control dial
on the climate control panel. To
adjust the passenger’s side, turn the
passenger’s side temperature control
dial.
DRIVER’ S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
Temperature Control
Push AUTO or
. The selected
temperatures appear in the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
adjusting the driver’s temperature
control dial.
DUAL BUTTON
136
2008 CR- V
PASSENGER’ S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
07/07/25
14:52:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0142
Table Of Contents
Dual Temperature Control
Driver’s Side
Passenger’s Side
Features
To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s side, press the DUAL
button, then turn the temperature
control dial on the control panel. To
set the passenger’s side to a
different value than the driver’s side,
turn the passenger’s side
temperature control dial. You can
adjust the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as ‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.
137
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:52:49
Main Menu
31SWA610
0143
Table Of Contents
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
138
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:53:00
Main Menu
31SWA610
0144
Table Of Contents
Audio System
An audio system is standard on all
models. Read the appropriate pages
(as shown below) to use your
vehicle’s audio system.
LX model
U.S. EX and Canadian EX, EX-L models
without navigation system
For LX, models, see pages
141 through 152 .
Features
For EX and EX-L models without
navigation system, see pages
153 through 169 .
For EX-L model with navigation
system, see pages 170 through 210 .
U.S. EX-L model without
navigation system
139
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:53:05
Main Menu
31SWA610
0145
Table Of Contents
Audio System
U.S. EX-L model with navigation system
Canadian EX-L model with navigation system
140
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:53:10
Main Menu
31SWA610
0146
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
U.S. and Canadian LX models
AM
FM
BUTTON BUTTON
Features
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
TUNE KNOB
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
141
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:53:16
Main Menu
31SWA610
0147
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune to
a higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
SEEK/SKIP − The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
142
2008 CR- V
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the right side of the A. SEL/SCAN
bar, then release it. You will see
SCAN in the display. The system will
scan for a station with a strong signal.
When it finds one, it will stop and
play that station for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN side of the bar again.
07/07/25
14:53:25
Main Menu
31SWA610
0148
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button (1−6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Press the left side of the
A. SEL/SCAN bar. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL side of the bar. This restores
the presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
211 .
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
143
2008 CR- V
Features
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
07/07/25
14:53:36
Main Menu
31SWA610
0149
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (LX model)
Adjusting the Sound
Press the SOUND (TUNE) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
Except SVC adjustment
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
144
2008 CR- V
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 76 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
07/07/25
14:53:41
Main Menu
31SWA610
0150
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
U.S. and Canadian LX model
CD/AUX
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
Features
LOAD
INDICATOR
POWER/
VOLUME KNOB
TUNE KNOB
A.SEL/SCAN
BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
145
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:53:50
Main Menu
31SWA610
0151
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
To Play a Disc
To load or play a disc, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio. To
select the disc player, press the CD/
AUX button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in the
display.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
146
2008 CR- V
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
07/07/25
14:53:59
Main Menu
31SWA610
0152
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
To Load a Disc
Text Data Display Function
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way to play it. You
operate the disc player with the
same controls used for the radio.
The number of the current track is
shown in the display. When playing a
disc in MP3 or WMA, the numbers
of the current folder and file are
shown. The system will continuously
play a disc until you change modes.
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
album, artist, and track tag.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
CONTINUED
147
2008 CR- V
Features
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192
kbps
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
07/07/25
14:54:07
Main Menu
31SWA610
0153
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
The display shows up to about 10
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 10
characters, you will see the first 9
characters and the > indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 10 characters
are shown.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release the
side of
the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA mode).
Press and release the
side, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
148
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:54:14
Main Menu
31SWA610
0154
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press the RPT button twice.
You will hear a beep and see F-RPT
in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder with
the TUNE knob also turns off the
repeat feature.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files in MP3
or WMA mode) in random order. To
activate random play, press and
release the RDM button. In MP3 or
WMA mode, press the RDM button
repeatedly to select RDM (within a
disc random play). You will see RDM
in the display. Press the RDM button
for 2 seconds to return to normal
play.
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, then to
normal playing.
CONTINUED
149
2008 CR- V
Features
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right to skip to the
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
07/07/25
14:54:22
Main Menu
31SWA610
0155
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press the RDM button 2 times. You
will hear a beep and see F-RDM in
the display. The system will then
select and play files randomly. This
continues until you deactivate folder
random by pressing and holding the
RDM button again, or by selecting a
different folder with the TUNE knob.
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press and
release the SCAN bar. You will see
SCAN in the display. You will get a
10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button for about 2 seconds to
get out of scan mode and play the
last track/file sampled.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar also turns off the scan
feature.
In MP3 or WMA mode
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN bar twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, selecting a different folder
with the TUNE knob, or pressing the
SCAN bar, also turns off the folder
scan.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN bar, the mode changes from
scan to folder scan, then to normal
playing.
150
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:54:28
Main Menu
31SWA610
0156
Table Of Contents
Playing a Disc (LX model)
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
Features
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the disc after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD/AUX button.
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
213 .
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM or FM button.
Press the CD/AUX button again to
switch back to the disc player.
151
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:54:36
Main Menu
31SWA610
0157
Table Of Contents
Disc Player Error Messages (LX model)
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page 214 .
Error Message
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORT
FORMAT
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
Track/File format not
supported
BAD DISC
CHECK MANUAL
Servo Error
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
see page 214 . Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Mechanical Error
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
152
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:54:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0158
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
U.S. EX-L
U.S. EX and Canadian EX and EX-L models
AM
BUTTON
FM
SCAN
BUTTON
BUTTON
AM
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
FM
BUTTON BUTTON
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
Features
SEEK BAR
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
SEEK BAR
TUNE KNOB
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
PRESET
BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB
153
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:54:51
Main Menu
31SWA610
0159
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM or
FM button. Adjust the volume by
turning the power/volume knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune to
a higher frequency, and turn it to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
SEEK − The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the
or
side of the
SEEK bar, then release it.
154
2008 CR- V
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
07/07/25
14:55:00
Main Menu
31SWA610
0160
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button (1−6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
Press the A. SEL button. You will see
A. SEL flashing in the display, and
the system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
To turn off auto select, press the
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
211 .
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
155
2008 CR- V
Features
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
07/07/25
14:55:12
Main Menu
31SWA610
0161
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
Press the TUNE (SOUND) knob
repeatedly to display the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE,
SUBWOOFER (if equipped), and
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) settings.
SVC − Adjusts the volume level
based on the vehicle speed.
choose low. If you feel the sound is
too quiet, choose high.
Each mode is shown in the display as
it changes. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking.
When the level reaches the center,
you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
If equipped
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation (SVC)
The SVC mode controls the volume
based on vehicle speed. The faster
you go, the louder the audio volume
becomes. As you slow down, the
audio volume decreases.
The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,
SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC
HIGH. Turn the TUNE knob to
adjust the setting to your liking. If
you feel the sound is too loud,
156
2008 CR- V
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page 76 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
07/07/25
14:55:19
Main Menu
31SWA610
0162
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model without navigation system)
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
On U.S. EX-L without Navigation
System
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
DISPLAY MODE BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
XM RADIO BUTTON
Features
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM satellite radio receives signals
from two satellites to produce clear,
high-quality digital reception. It
offers many channels in several
categories. Along with a large
selection of different types of music,
XM satellite radio allows you to view
channel and category selections in
the display.
PRESET BUTTONS
TUNE KNOB
157
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:55:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0163
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model without navigation system)
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the ‘‘XM’’
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob to
change channel selections. Turn the
knob right for higher numbered
channels and left for lower
numbered channels. In the category
mode, you can only select channels
within that category.
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) −
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar (
or
) to select another
category.
158
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:55:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0164
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model without navigation system)
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
3. Pick the preset button you want
for that channel. Press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
5. Press the XM button again. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
To store a channel:
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button to
tune to it.
CONTINUED
159
2008 CR- V
Features
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to
continue listening to, press the
button again.
07/07/25
14:55:43
Main Menu
31SWA610
0165
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model without navigation system)
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist, or is not part
of your subscription, or this channel
has no artist or title information at
this time.
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
SATELLITE
GROUND REPEATER
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
160
2008 CR- V
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
07/07/25
14:55:53
Main Menu
31SWA610
0166
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model without navigation system)
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Satellite Radio service
has expired or you purchased your
vehicle from a previous owner, you
can listen to a sampling of the
broadcasts available on XM Satellite
Radio. With the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,
push the power/volume knob to turn
on the audio system and press the
XM button. A variety of music types
and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press TUNE until
‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D.
will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
161
2008 CR- V
Features
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
07/07/25
14:56:02
Main Menu
31SWA610
0167
Table Of Contents
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Playing a Disc
U.S. EX and Canadian EX and EX-L models
REPEAT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
LOAD
INDICATOR
DISC SLOT
U.S. EX-L model
LOAD INDICATOR CD/AUX
BUTTON
DISPLAY
BUTTON
DISC SLOT
EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
DISPLAY
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
SCAN
SEEK/SKIP BAR
BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON TUNE KNOB
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
162
2008 CR- V
TUNE KNOB
07/07/25
14:56:14
Main Menu
31SWA610
0168
Table Of Contents
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
This audio system can also play
CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in
MP3 or WMA formats. When
playing a disc in MP3, you will see
‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMA
format, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in the
display. You can select up to 99
folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays FORMAT, and then skips to
the next file.
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications of the compatible
MP3 file are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications of the compatible
WMA file are:
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192
kbps
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
163
2008 CR- V
Features
To Play a Disc
To load or play discs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position.
You operate the disc changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the disc changer, press the
CD button (CD/AUX button on
models with satellite radio), the disc
and track numbers are displayed.
The system will continuously play a
disc until you change modes.
07/07/25
14:56:23
Main Menu
31SWA610
0169
Table Of Contents
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
1. Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ on
the display.
3. Insert the disc into the disc slot
when the green disc load indicator
comes on. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way. You will see
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display while the
disc load indicator turns red and
blinks as the disc is loaded.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
2. The disc number for an empty
position is highlighted and the red
disc load indicator starts blinking.
4. When the disc load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the
display again, insert the next disc
in the slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until ‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You
could damage the audio unit.
Loading Discs in the In-dash Disc
Changer
Your vehicle’s in-dash disc changer
holds up to six discs.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last disc loaded.
164
2008 CR- V
You can also load a disc into an
empty position while a disc is playing
by pressing the appropriate preset
button. The system stops playing the
current disc and starts the loading
sequence. It then plays the disc just
loaded.
07/07/25
14:56:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0170
Table Of Contents
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Text Data Display Function
Each time you press the DISP button,
the display shows you the text data
on a disc, if the disc was recorded
with text data.
With the folder name, you will see
the FOLDER indicator in the display.
The TRACK indicator is shown with
the file or track name.
The display shows up to about 16
characters of selected text data (the
folder name, file name, etc.). If the
text data has more than 16
characters, you will see the first 15
characters and the > indicator in
the display. Press and hold the DISP
button until the next 16 characters
are shown.
When a new folder, file, or track is
selected.
When you change the audio mode
to play a disc with text data or in
MP3 or WMA.
When you insert a disc, and the
system begins to play.
When playing a CD-DA with text
data, the album and track name are
shown in the display. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, the display shows the
folder and file name.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1 − 6). If
you select an empty position in the
disc changer, the system will try to
load the disc in the next available
slot.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks (files in
MP3/WMA mode).
SEEK/SKIP − Each time you
press and release the
side of
the SEEK/SKIP bar, the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA mode).
Press and release the
side, to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the
or
side of the
SEEK/SKIP bar.
CONTINUED
165
2008 CR- V
Features
You can see the album, artist, and
track name in the display. If a disc is
recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can
see the folder and file name, and the
artist, album, and track tag.
You will also see some text data
under these conditions:
07/07/25
14:56:43
Main Menu
31SWA610
0171
Table Of Contents
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, turn the
TUNE knob to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Turn
the knob to the right to skip to the
next folder, and to the left to move to
the beginning of the current folder.
Turn it again to skip to the beginning
of the previous folder. Turning the
TUNE knob more than one click
skips several folders at a time.
REPEAT (TRACK/FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds to turn it off.
You will hear a beep.
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and release the RPT
button repeatedly until you see FRPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current
folder. Press and hold the RPT
button for 2 seconds to turn it off.
Selecting a different folder with the
TUNE knob also turns off the repeat
feature.
a disc in MP3 or WMA mode) in
random order. To activate random
play, press and release the RDM
button. In MP3 or WMA mode, press
the RDM button repeatedly to select
RDM (within a disc random play).
You will see RDM in the display.
Press the RDM button for 2 seconds
to return to normal play.
DISC-REPEAT − To continuously
replay the current disc, press and
release the RPT button repeatedly
until you see D-RPT in the display.
Press and hold the RPT button for 2
seconds again to turn it off.
FOLDER-RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files on the selected folder in random
order. To activate folder random,
press and release the RDM button.
You will see F-RDM in the display.
The system will then select and play
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate folder random by
pressing and holding the RDM
button for 2 seconds, or by selecting
a different folder with the TUNE
knob.
In MP3 or WMA mode
Each time you press and release the
RPT button, the mode changes from
file repeat to folder repeat, to disc
repeat then to normal playing.
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER-REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
RANDOM (Random within a
disc) − This feature plays the
tracks within a disc (the files within
166
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:56:51
Main Menu
31SWA610
0172
Table Of Contents
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Each time you press and release the
RDM button, the mode changes
from folder random play to random
play (within a disc random play),
then to normal playing.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar also turns off the scan
feature.
The system plays the first file in the
first folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system will then
play the first files in the remaining
folders for 10 seconds each. After
playing the first file of the last folder,
the system plays normally.
DISC-SCAN − This function
samples each first track of all the
discs in the in-dash disc changer in
the order they are stored. To
activate disc scan, press the SCAN
button repeatedly until you will see
D-SCAN in the display. The system
will then play the first track/file of
the first disc for approximately 10
seconds. After playing the first
track/file of the last disc, the system
plays normally.
Pressing either side of the SEEK/
SKIP bar, or selecting a different
folder with the TUNE knob also
turns off the scan feature.
Each time you press and release the
SCAN button, the mode changes
from scan to folder scan, disc scan
then to normal playing.
167
2008 CR- V
Features
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc in
the order they are recorded on the
disc. To activate scan, press the
SCAN button. In MP3 or WMA
mode, press the SCAN button
repeatedly to select SCAN. You will
see SCAN in the display. You will get
a 10 second sampling of each track/
file on the disc. Press and hold the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode and play the last track/file
sampled.
In MP3 or WMA mode
F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN) − This
feature, when activated, samples the
first file of each folder on the disc.
To activate folder scan, press the
SCAN button twice. You will see
F-SCAN in the display.
07/07/25
14:56:57
Main Menu
31SWA610
0173
Table Of Contents
Playing Discs (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
To Stop Playing a Disc
Press the AM, FM, AUX button, or
CD/AUX, XM button to switch to
the radio or satellite radio (U.S.
models), while a disc is playing.
Press the CD button again to play
the disc.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition switch, the disc will stay in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the disc will begin playing
where it left off.
Removing Discs from the In-dash
Disc Changer
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject (
) button. When
a disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
disc in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 10 seconds, the system
returns to the previous mode (AM,
FM or satellite radio*). The disc will
reload into the system and will
remain there in a pause mode.
To remove a different disc from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
disc begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
* : On U.S. EX-L model
168
2008 CR- V
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
07/07/25
14:57:05
Main Menu
31SWA610
0174
Table Of Contents
Disc Player Error Messages (EX and EX-L models without navigation system)
Error Message
Cause
Solution
UNSUPPORTED
FORMAT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
PUSH EJECT
BAD DISC
PLEASE CHECK
OWNERS
MANUAL
Track/File format not
supported
Current track will be skipped. The next
supported track or file plays automatically.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc(s).
Check the disc for serious damage, signs of
deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt
see page 214 . Insert the disc again. If the code
does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be
removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to
force the disc out of the player.
Mechanical Error
Servo Error
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page 214 .
The ejected disc will not be reloaded automatically.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
169
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:57:12
Main Menu
31SWA610
0175
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)
U.S. model
Canadian model
AUTO SELECT ICON
FM1 ICON AM ICON
FM2
ICON
AUTO SELECT ICON
SOUND ICON
FM1 ICON
BACK GROUND ICON
AM/FM
BUTTON
AM ICON
FM2 ICON SOUND ICON
BACK GROUND ICON
AM/FM
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PRESET BUTTON
TUNE BAR
170
2008 CR- V
PRESET BUTTON
07/07/25
14:57:22
Main Menu
31SWA610
0176
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)
To Play the AM/FM Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
power/volume knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the power/volume knob.
the bottom of the screen each time
you operate any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see audio information
by touching the AUDIO INFO icon
on the lower of the screen.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to are displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button, or touch the desired band
icon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1*, or XM
2*). On the FM band, STEREO will
be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
* : On U.S. model
Pushing the AUDIO button will also
turn on the system.
To Select a Station
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the ▲ side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
▼ side to tune to a lower
frequency.
Press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of
the TUNE bar until you hear two
beeps to change the frequency
rapidly. Release the bar when the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
For information on XM radio, see
page 176 .
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Use the
control buttons on the left side of the
screen. The status bar appears on
CONTINUED
171
2008 CR- V
Features
Voice Control System
In addition to the standard audio
controls, the audio system in your
vehicle can be operated using the
voice control system. See the
navigation section in your Quick
Start Guide for an overview of this
system, and the Navigation System
Manual for complete details.
07/07/25
14:57:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0177
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)
SEEK − The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press and hold the ▲ or ▼ side of
the TUNE bar until you hear a beep,
then release it.
SCAN − The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Preset − Each preset button can
store one frequency on AM and two
frequencies on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
172
2008 CR- V
Each preset button’s frequency is
shown on the bottom of the audio
display.
07/07/25
14:57:35
Main Menu
31SWA610
0178
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Features
Press the AUDIO button to view the
audio control icons, then press the
AUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTO
SEL flashing in the display, and the
system goes into scan mode for
several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
To turn off auto select, press the
AUTO SEL icon. This restores the
presets you originally set.
For information on AM/FM radio
frequencies and reception, see page
211 .
173
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:57:47
Main Menu
31SWA610
0179
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)
Adjusting the Sound
SPEAKER SETTING
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-toside strength of the sound.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the L or R icon.
SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
strength of sound from the
subwoofer speaker. To adjust the
sound strength, touch
or
on each side of the adjustment
bar.
BASS/TREBLE SETTING
SOUND ICON
You can adjust the sound on the
navigation screen. To adjust the
sound, push the AUDIO button, then
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUND icon on the display.
BASS − Adjusts the bass.
The right upper display shows you
the current setting of the sound
strength coming from each speaker.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble. To
adjust the treble and bass, touch
or
on each side of the
treble or bass adjustment bar. The
adjustment bar on the right lower
display shows you the current
setting.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back
strength of the sound. To adjust the
front/rear fader, touch the FR or RR
icon.
SVC (speed-sensitive volume
compensation) − The SVC mode
controls the volume based on vehicle
speed. The faster you go, the louder
the audio volume becomes. As you
slow down, the audio volume
decreases. Touch the appropriate
icon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select the
mode.
174
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:57:54
Main Menu
31SWA610
0180
Table Of Contents
Playing the AM/FM Radio (EX-L model with navigation system)
This function is set to MID as the
default setting when the vehicle
leaves the factory. If you feel the
sound is too loud, choose low. If you
feel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi.
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the control panel (see
page 76 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Features
You can also select the icon with the
joystick. Move it up and down to
move the highlighting and scroll
through lists. Select the icon, then
move the joystick to left or right to
change the setting.
Screen Mode
You can select the background
screen to display the sound level.
There are three screen modes: level
(the sound level is shown with the
vertical bars), spectrum analysis (the
sound level appears as ripples of
water), and off. Each time you touch
the background icon, the display
changes.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
175
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:57:59
Main Menu
31SWA610
0181
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
XM RADIO ICON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
MODE ICON
JOYSTICK
CATEGORY
INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
XM RADIO
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET CHANNEL
NUMBER
TUNE BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
176
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:58:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0182
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
On U.S. EX-L model with Navigation
System
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, highquality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
When you press and hold the
AUDIO button, the display also
shows all XM information.
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, disc, pc card, etc.,
by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display.
MODE − To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
touch the MODE icon. In channel
mode, you can select all of the
available channels. In category mode,
such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,
you can select all of the channels
within that category. Each time you
touch and release the MODE icon,
the display changes between the
channel mode and the category
mode.
You can also operate the radio using
the control buttons on the left side of
the screen. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen each
time you press any of the control
buttons. On the navigation screen,
you can also see the audio
information by touching the AUDIO
INFO icon on the lower of the screen.
CONTINUED
177
2008 CR- V
Features
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Operating the XM Radio
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
power/volume knob to turn on the
audio system, and press the CD/XM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. The last channel you
listened to will show in the display.
07/07/25
14:58:16
Main Menu
31SWA610
0183
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
TUNE − Press the TUNE bar to
change channel selections. Press
▲ for higher numbered channels
and ▼ for lower numbered
channels. In the category mode, you
can only select channels within that
category.
Preset − You can store up to 12
preset channels using each preset
button or preset icons on the screen.
Each preset button or icon stores
one channel from the XM1 band and
one channel from the XM2 band.
To store a channel:
CATEGORY − Press and hold
either side of the TUNE bar
(
or
) until you hear a beep
to select another category.
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
SCAN − The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN button. The
system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button again.
178
2008 CR- V
1. Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
function to tune to a desired
channel.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
3. Pick the preset button (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the button (icon) until you
hear a beep.
07/07/25
14:58:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0184
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it. Each preset
button’s channel is shown on the
bottom of the audio display.
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the
audio or program information.
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel
currently selected is no longer
broadcasting.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption
code is being updated. Wait until the
encryption code is fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1 should still work
normally.
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is
currently too weak. Move the vehicle
to an area away from tall buildings,
and with an unobstructed view of the
southern horizon.
‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel
number does not exist or is not part
of your subscription.
‘‘NO INFO’’ − This channel has no
artist or title information at this time.
‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM antenna. Please consult
your dealer.
CONTINUED
179
2008 CR- V
Features
5. Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
XM Radio Display Messages
07/07/25
14:58:31
Main Menu
31SWA610
0185
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
180
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:58:41
Main Menu
31SWA610
0186
Table Of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. EX-L model with navigation system)
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
If your XM Satellite Radio service
has expired or you purchased your
vehicle from a previous owner, you
can listen to a sampling of the
broadcasts available on XM Satellite
Radio. With the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,
push the power/volume knob to turn
on the audio system and press the
XM button. A variety of music types
and styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
181
2008 CR- V
Features
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
07/07/25
14:58:46
Main Menu
31SWA610
0187
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
CD ICON
POWER/VOLUME
KNOB
JOYSTICK
OPEN BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
TUNE BAR
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
182
2008 CR- V
SKIP+BUTTON
SKIP−BUTTON
U.S. model is shown
07/07/25
14:59:00
Main Menu
31SWA610
0188
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
To Play a Disc
(In-dash single player)
You operate the in-dash disc player
with the same controls used for the
radio. To load or play discs, the
ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
This audio system can also play CDRs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3
or WMA formats. When playing a
disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ on
the screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’
will appear on the screen. You can
select up to 255 folders and play up
Video CDs and DVD discs do not
work in this unit.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/
160/192/224/256/320 kbps
(MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bit rate:
32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192
kbps
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
NOTE:
If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is
protected by digital rights
management (DRM), the audio unit
displays CD FORMAT, and then
skips to the next file.
183
2008 CR- V
Features
Your vehicle also has the CD
changer and operate at with the
same in-dash disc player. (see page
191 )
to 999 tracks. If the disc has a
complex structure, it takes a while to
read the disc before the system
begins to play it.
07/07/25
14:59:08
Main Menu
31SWA610
0189
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
To Load a Disc
DISC SLOT
OPEN BUTTON
The in-dash disc player is behind the
navigation screen. To use the disc
player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the disc slot appears.
CLOSE BUTTON
Insert a disc about halfway into the
disc slot. The drive will pull the disc
in the rest of the way and begin to
play it.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
184
2008 CR- V
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button on
the edge of the screen panel. Do not
use the folded screen as a tray. If
you put a cup, for example, on the
screen, the liquid inside the cup may
spill on the screen when you go over
a bump.
07/07/25
14:59:17
Main Menu
31SWA610
0190
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the disc player.
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, the track, album, and artist
name are shown on the audio display.
When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,
the folder number and name, the file
number and name, the artist name,
and the elapsed time are shown. The
system will continuously play a disc
until you change modes. If the disc
was not recorded with text data, it
will not be displayed.
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
PRESET BUTTONS
U.S. model is shown
You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks (files in MP3 or
WMA mode). Each preset button’s
function is shown on the bottom of
the screen.
You can also select an icon with the
joystick. Move it to left, right, up, or
down to change the highlighting and
scroll through lists. Then press the
ENT on the top of the joystick to
select the icon.
SKIP − Each time you press and
release
(preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track (file in MP3 or WMA
mode). Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
FF/REW − To move rapidly within
a track/file, press and hold
(preset 4) or
(preset 3).
CONTINUED
185
2008 CR- V
Features
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press the
CD button. The status bar appears
on the bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
lower portion of the screen.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
07/07/25
14:59:24
Main Menu
31SWA610
0191
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move to the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip
to the next folder, and the ▼ side to
move to the beginning of the current
folder. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous folder.
FOLDER REPEAT − This feature,
when activated, replays all files on
the selected folder in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
repeat, press and hold the RPT
button (preset 1) for 2 seconds. You
will see FOLDER REPEAT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current folder. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
Selecting a different folder with the
TUNE bar also turns off folder
repeat.
FOLDER RANDOM − This
feature, when activated, plays all
files in the selected folder in random
order, rather than in the order they
are compressed. To activate folder
random, press and hold the RDM
button. You will see FOLDER
RANDOM in the display. The
system then selects and plays files
randomly. This continues until you
deactivate folder random by pressing
the RDM button again, or if you
select a different folder with the
TUNE bar.
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),
press and release the RPT button
(preset 1). You will see TRACK
REPEAT in the display. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a disc/folder) − This
feature plays the tracks/files within
a disc in random order. To activate
track random, press and release the
RDM button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
186
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:59:32
Main Menu
31SWA610
0192
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6) also turns off scan.
In MP3 or WMA mode
FOLDER SCAN − This feature,
when activated, samples all the first
files in each folder on the disc in
order. To activate folder scan, press
and hold the SCAN button for 2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
SCAN in the display.
The system plays the first file in
each folder for about 10 seconds. If
you do nothing, the system then
plays the first file in each folder for
10 seconds each. After playing the
first file of the last folder, the system
goes to normal playing.
Pressing either SKIP button (preset
5 or 6), or selecting a different folder
with the TUNE bar, or pressing the
SCAN button, also turns off folder
scan.
Using a Track List
FOLDER ICON
TRACK/FILE ICON
Features
SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN) −
The scan function samples all tracks
(files in MP3 or WMA) in the order
they were recorded. To activate scan,
press and release the SCAN button.
You will see TRACK SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track/file on the
disc. Press the SCAN button to get
out of scan mode and play the last
track/file sampled.
FOLDER NUMBER
RETURN ICON
You can also select a track/file
directly from a track list on the audio
display. Press the AUDIO button to
show the audio display, then touch
the Track List icon. The track list
menu appears on the display.
CONTINUED
187
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:59:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0193
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
When playing a CD recorded with
text data, each track name is shown
on the audio display. With a disc
recorded in MP3 or WMA, the folder
number and the location are also
displayed.
If the disc was not recorded with text
data, only the track number is shown.
Select the desired track/file by
touching the icon on the display. The
selected icon will be highlighted in
blue. The system begins to play the
selected track/file. With a disc in
MP3 or WMA, touch the folder icon
on the upper left of the screen to
move to the parent folder. The
current folder is highlighted in blue.
To scroll through the display, touch
the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the
screen. To go back to the previous
display, touch the Return icon on the
screen.
To Stop Playing a Disc
To play the radio when a disc is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1*, or
XM2* icon. If a PC card is in the
audio unit, touch the CARD icon to
play the PC card. If a CD or CDs are
loaded in the CD changer, touch the
CDC icon to play the CD changer.
Press the CD button again or touch
the CD icon to switch back to the
disc player.
If you turn the system off while a
disc is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the disc will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the disc will begin
playing where it left off.
* : U.S. model only
188
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:59:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0194
Table Of Contents
Playing a disc (EX-L model with navigation system)
Removing a Disc
Protecting Discs
For information on how to handle
and protect discs, see page 213 .
Features
To remove a disc from the audio unit,
fold back the screen by pressing the
OPEN button (see page 184 ). Press
the disc eject button (
) to
remove the disc. If you eject the disc,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
it after 10 seconds and put it in pause
mode. To begin playing, press the
CD button.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
You cannot close the screen if a disc
is partially inserted into its slot.
You can also eject the disc when the
ignition switch is off.
189
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
14:59:52
Main Menu
31SWA610
0195
Table Of Contents
Disc Player Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page 214 .
Error Message
DISC ERROR
MECH ERROR
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
TOC Error
DISC
HEAT ERROR
High Temperature
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
190
2008 CR- V
Solution
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
For more information see page 214 .
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation. For
more information see page 214 .
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
07/07/25
14:59:59
Main Menu
31SWA610
0196
Table Of Contents
CD Changer (EX-L model with navigation system)
U.S. model
Canadian model
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
CD ICON
CD CHANGER ICON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
CD ICON CD CHANGER ICON
JOYSTICK
JOYSTICK
OPEN
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AUDIO
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
Features
OPEN
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
SKIP+BUTTON
SKIP−BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
SKIP+BUTTON
SKIP−BUTTON
FAST FORWARD
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
191
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:00:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0197
Table Of Contents
CD Changer (EX-L model with navigation system)
Loading CDs in the Changer
Your vehicle has the CD changer in
the center console.
CD-R, CD-RW disc, and CD
compressed in MP3 and WMA will
not work in this unit. Video CDs and
DVD discs also will not work.
Do not spill any liquids on the center
console. Spilled liquids can damage
electrical components in the CD
changer.
EJECT BUTTON
1. Open the center console cover,
then slide open the CD changer
cover by pulling it rearward.
192
2008 CR- V
2. Push the EJECT button to remove
the CD magazine. The magazine
will pop up automatically.
07/07/25
15:00:13
Main Menu
31SWA610
0198
Table Of Contents
CD Changer (EX-L model with navigation system)
4. Put a CD on the tray with the
printed surface facing up as shown.
5. Reinstall the tray in the magazine.
Repeat this procedure to open the
other five trays.
Features
6. Store all six trays in the magazine,
and reinstall the magazine in the
CD changer as shown.
3. To install a CD into the magazine,
push the button while pulling out
on the tab.
7. Make sure to slide the CD
changer cover closed until it clicks.
To remove CDs from the CD
changer, refer to the loading
procedure.
193
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:00:21
Main Menu
31SWA610
0199
Table Of Contents
CD Changer (EX-L model with navigation system)
To Play a CD
To play CDs, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON (II) position.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the indash disc player or the radio. To
select the CD changer, touch the
CDC icon. The disc and track
numbers are displayed. The system
will continuously play a CD until you
change modes.
To select a different disc, use the
preset buttons (5 or 6). Press and
release the Preset 5 (DISC −)
button to select the previous disc or
Preset 6 (DISC +) to select the next
disc in sequence. Pressing the ▲ or
▼ side of the TUNE bar also
changes the disc. If you select an
empty position in the CD changer,
the system will try to load the CD in
the next available slot.
TUNE
BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
You can use the preset buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks. Each preset
button function is shown on the
bottom of the screen.
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the CD
to jam in the unit.
194
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:00:28
Main Menu
31SWA610
0200
Table Of Contents
CD Changer (EX-L model with navigation system)
button
SKIP − Push the
(preset 6) to play the next track on
the disc. Push the
button
(preset 5) once to replay the track in
play; press it twice to replay the
previous track.
REPEAT (Track Repeat) − To
continuously replay a track, press
and release the RPT button (preset
1). You will see TRACK REPEAT in
the display. Press the RPT button
again to turn it off.
DISC REPEAT − To continuously
replay the current CD, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) until
you see the DISC REPEAT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
DISC SCAN − Press and hold the
SCAN button to get a 10 second
sampling of the first song of each
disc in the CD changer. You will see
DISC SCAN in the display. Press and
hold the button again to turn it off.
Features
FF/REW − To move more rapidly
within a track, press and hold the
(preset 4) or
(preset 3)
button.
RANDOM (Track Random) −
Press and release the RDM button
(preset 2) to play the tracks in
random order. You will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display. Press the
RDM button again to return to
normal play.
DISC RANDOM − To play all
tracks in each CD in random order,
press and hold the RDM button
(preset 2) until you see DISC
RANDOM in the display. Press the
RDM button again to return to
normal play.
SCAN (Track Scan) − The SCAN
function samples all the tracks on
the selected disc in the order they
are recorded. To activate it, press
and release the SCAN button. You
will see TRACK SCAN in the display,
and you will get a 10 second
sampling of each track on the
selected CD. Press the SCAN button
again to get out of scan mode.
195
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:00:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0201
Table Of Contents
CD Changer (EX-L model with navigation system)
To Stop Playing a CD
Press the AM/FM or CD/XM*
button to switch to the radio or
satellite radio while a CD is playing.
If there is a PC card in the audio unit,
touch the CARD icon to switch to
the PC card while a CD is playing.
Touch the CDC icon again to play
the CD in the CD changer.
If you turn the system off while a CD
in the CD changer is playing, the CD
will stay in the drive. When you turn
the system back on, the CD will be in
pause mode. Touch the CDC icon on
the audio screen. The CD will begin
playing where it left off.
* : On U.S. model only
196
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:00:41
Main Menu
31SWA610
0202
Table Of Contents
CD Changer Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)
Error Message
DISC ERROR
MECH ERROR
Cause
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
Solution
The disc is pulled out.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
For more information see page 214 .
Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation. For
more information see page 214 .
If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
The audio system will try to play the
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
197
2008 CR- V
Features
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
your vehicle to your dealer.
The chart on the right explains the
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
For the additional information on
damaged discs, see page 214 .
07/07/25
15:00:49
31SWA610
Main Menu
0203
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
U.S. model
Canadian model
TRACK LIST ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
PC CARD ICON JOYSTICK
OPEN
BUTTON
CD/XM
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
POWER/VOLUME KNOB
PC CARD ICON
JOYSTICK
OPEN
BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
TUNE BAR
PLAY
MODE
ICON
REPEAT BUTTON
SKIP −
BUTTON
FAST
RANDOM BUTTON FORWARD
BUTTON
PLAY
MODE
ICON
REPEAT BUTTON
SKIP +
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
SKIP −
BUTTON
FAST
FORWARD
BUTTON
REWIND BUTTON
198
2008 CR- V
SKIP +
BUTTON
07/07/25
15:01:03
Main Menu
31SWA610
0204
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
To Play a PC Card
You operate the PC card player with
the same controls used for the radio
and the disc player. To load or play a
card, the ignition switch must be in
the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,
the recommended PC cards for the
PC card reader are:
CompactFlash
Flash ATA
SD memory card
NOTE:
When you insert a PC card into
the slot, make sure you put it in
straight. If you cannot insert it,
remove it, and insert again.
Do not keep PC cards in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high
heat will damage them.
To avoid damaging the card
reader, do not insert hard disc
drive cards into the PC card slot.
Never insert foreign objects into
the PC card slot.
The specifications for compatible
MP3 files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)
24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)
−Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160/192/224/256/320
kbps (MPEG1)
8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/
112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
You cannot close the screen
(move it to the upright position)
until the PC card is inserted all the
way into its slot or removed.
CONTINUED
199
2008 CR- V
Features
The PC card player reads and plays
cards in MP3 or WMA formats.
Depending on the format, the screen
will indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ when
a card is playing. The card limit of
the player is 255 folders and 999
tracks. If the card has a complex
structure, it takes some time for the
system to begin playing it.
Always use the recommended
memory card with the appropriate
adapter (if an adapter is needed).
Some memory cards will not work in
this unit.
07/07/25
15:01:13
Main Menu
31SWA610
0205
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
The specifications for compatible
WMA files are:
−Sampling frequency:
32/44.1/48 kHz
−Bit rate:
48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps
−Compatible with variable bit rate
and multi-session
−Maximum layers
(including ROOT): 8 layers
In WMA format, DRM (digital rights
management) files cannot be played.
If the system finds a DRM file, it
skips that file and plays the next
available folder or file.
Loading a PC Card
PC CARD SLOT
Insert a PC card straight into the slot.
The drive will read the PC card and
begin to play it.
Return the screen to the upright
position by pressing the CLOSE
button on the edge of the screen
panel.
Push the AUDIO button beside the
screen to show the audio display and
operate the PC card player.
The PC card slot is behind the
navigation screen. To use the PC
card player, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the PC card slot appears.
200
2008 CR- V
You can also operate the audio
system without using the control
icons on the audio screen. Press any
of the appropriate control buttons.
The status bar appears on the
bottom of the screen. On the
navigation screen, you can see the
audio information whenever you
touch the AUDIO INFO icon on the
screen.
07/07/25
15:01:24
Main Menu
31SWA610
0206
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
There are three play modes: Folder,
Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAY
MODE icon, then choose one of the
modes by touching its icon. When a
mode is selected, it is highlighted in
blue.
To Select a Play Mode
FOLDER MODE
PLAY MODE ICON
MODE INDICATOR
Artist mode plays tracks in
alphabetical order, by artist and
song title.
Features
Folder mode plays tracks in the
order they were added to the card.
ARTIST MODE
PLAY MODE ICON
ALBUM MODE
PLAY MODE ICON
Album mode plays albums
(folders) in alphabetical order.
If play mode information was not
included in the tracks/files when
they were added to the card, it will
not be displayed on the screen.
U.S. model is shown
MODE INDICATOR
MODE INDICATOR
CONTINUED
201
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:01:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0207
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
PLAY MODE ICON
U.S. EX-L model is shown
To select a play mode, push the
AUDIO button to show the audio
display, then touch the PLAY MODE
icon on the display.
Select the desired mode by touching
the appropriate icon, or move the
joystick, then press the ENT.
202
2008 CR- V
After you select the play mode, the
display changes to the selectable
playing menu. If you select
‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode after playing the current
file.
07/07/25
15:01:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0208
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’
the system goes into the selected
play mode immediately and begins to
play the new track list.
To Change or Select Tracks/Files
PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION
Features
To go back to the previous screen,
press the CANCEL button on the
right side of the screen. To exit the
play mode screens, press the AUDIO
button.
Icons on the screen can also be
selected with the joystick. Move the
joystick left or right and up or down
until the icon is highlighted, then
press the ENT on the top of the
joystick to select the icon.
PRESET BUTTONS
U.S. model is shown
You can use the preset buttons while
a card is playing to select or change
files. Each preset button’s function is
shown on the bottom of the screen.
CONTINUED
203
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:01:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0209
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
SKIP − Each time you press and
release
(preset 6), the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next file. Press and release
(preset 5), to skip backward to
the beginning of the current file.
Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous file.
FF/REW − To move rapidly within
a file, press and hold
(preset 4)
or
(preset 3).
FOLDER SELECTION − To
select a different folder, press either
side of the TUNE bar to move the
beginning of the next folder. Press
the ▲ side of the TUNE bar to skip
the next folder, and to the ▼ side to
move the beginning of the current
folder. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous folder.
TRACK REPEAT (FILE
REPEAT) − To continuously replay
a file, press and release the RPT
button (preset 1). You will see
TRACK REPEAT in the display.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
REPEAT − This feature, when
activated, replays all the files on the
selected folder/artist/album in the
order they are recorded or listed. To
activate each repeat mode, press and
hold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2
seconds. You will see FOLDER
REPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT or
ALBUM REPEAT in the display.
The system continuously replays the
current folder/artist/album. Press
and hold the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing the RDM button,
or selecting a different folder/artist/
album with the TUNE bar also turns
off the repeat feature.
204
2008 CR- V
TRACK RANDOM (Random
within a folder) − This feature
plays the files within a folder in
random order. To activate random
play, press and release the RDM
button (preset 2). You will see
TRACK RANDOM in the display.
Press the RDM button again to
return to normal play.
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
RANDOM − This feature, when
activated, plays all files in each
folder/artist/album in random order,
rather than in the order they are
recorded or listed. To activate each
random play, push and hold the
RDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.
You will see FOLDER RANDOM,
ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUM
RANDOM in the display.
07/07/25
15:01:50
Main Menu
31SWA610
0210
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
The system then selects and plays
files randomly. This continues until
you deactivate each random play by
pressing the RDM button again.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scan
feature.
Pressing either of the SKIP buttons
(preset 5 or 6), selecting a different
folder/artist/album with the TUNE
bar, or pressing the SCAN button,
also turns off the scan feature.
Features
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the files on the PC card
in the order they are recorded. To
activate the scan feature, press and
release the SCAN button. You will
see TRACK SCAN in the display.
You will get a 10 second sampling of
each file on the PC card. Press the
SCAN button again to get out of scan
mode and play the last file sampled.
FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM
SCAN − This feature, when
activated, samples the first file in
each folder/artist/album on the PC
card in order. To activate each scan
feature, press and hold the SCAN
button. You will see FOLDER SCAN,
ARTIST SCAN or ALBUM SCAN in
the display.
The system plays the first file in the
folder for about 10 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system plays the first
file in each folder, in order, for 10
seconds each. After playing the first
file of the last folder/artist/album,
the system returns to normal play.
205
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:01:58
Main Menu
31SWA610
0211
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
Using a Track List
FOLDER ICON
TRACK LIST ICON
U.S. EX-L model is shown
You can also select a file directly
from a track list on the audio display.
Press the AUDIO button to show the
audio display, then touch the Track
List icon. The track list menu
appears on the display.
ARTIST NAME
RETURN ICON
To scroll through the display, touch
the ▲ or ▼ icon on the side of the
screen. To go back to the previous
display, touch the Return icon.
To play a file, touch its icon on the
screen. In folder mode, touch the
folder icon on the upper left of the
screen to move to the parent folder.
The current folder is highlighted in
blue.
206
2008 CR- V
In artist mode, the artist name is also
displayed on the right side of each
selectable icon. Select the desired
file.
07/07/25
15:02:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0212
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
Song Search Function
ALBUM NAME
SONG SEARCH ICON
TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON
Features
RETURN ICON
Folder mode is shown.
In album mode, the album name is
also displayed on the right side of
each selectable icon. Select the
desired file.
When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ from
the track list display, the song search
menu appears.
ARTIST ICON
ALBUM ICON
You can then select any of three
modes to search a file: Title by
Keyword, Artist, and Album.
CONTINUED
207
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:02:15
Main Menu
31SWA610
0213
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
Searching for a Song Title by Keyword
MORE ICON
To cancel the selected letter, touch
the Delete icon. To select more
characters, touch the More icon.
The other character list will be
shown.
Searching for a Song by Artist Name
ARTIST LIST
FILE LIST
DELETE ICON
LIST ICON
In Title by Keyword mode, enter the
title name, or any keyword, by
touching the letter icons on the
screen. Press the List icon to begin
the song search. If you press the
CANCEL button on the control panel,
the display returns to the mode
menu without doing a search.
Select the Artist icon, and the artist
list appears. Select the desired artist,
and the artist’s file list is displayed.
After the system searches for a song,
a file list is displayed. To scroll
through the list, touch the ▲ or ▼
icon on the side of the screen. Select
the desired file by touching the
appropriate icon, or moving the
joystick and pressing the ENT.
208
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:02:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0214
Table Of Contents
Playing a PC card (EX-L model with navigation system)
Searching for a Song by Album Name
ALBUM LIST
Removing a PC Card
To remove a PC card from the audio
unit, fold back the screen by
pressing the OPEN button (see page
184 ). Press the eject button (
)
to remove the card. If you do not
remove it from the slot, you cannot
return the screen to the upright
position.
To return the screen to the upright
position, press the CLOSE button.
* : U.S. model
Select the Album icon, and the
album list appears. Select the desired
album, and its song list is displayed.
You can then select the desired song
from the list.
If you turn the system off while a PC
card is playing, either with the
power/volume knob or by turning
off the ignition switch, the card will
stay in the drive. When you turn the
system back on, the card will begin
playing where it left off.
You can also eject a card when the
ignition switch is off.
PC Card Player Malfunction
If there is a problem with the PC
card player, see your dealer.
When you leave the vehicle, always
remove the PC card from the audio
unit.
209
2008 CR- V
Features
To Stop Playing a PC Card
To play the radio when a PC card is
playing, press the AM/FM button or
touch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1*, or
XM2* icon. If a disc is in the audio
unit, press the CD button or touch
the CD icon to play the disc. If a CD
or CDs are in the CD changer, touch
the CDC icon to play the disc(s).
Touch the CARD icon to switch back
to the PC card player.
07/07/25
15:02:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0215
Table Of Contents
PC card Error Messages (EX-L model with navigation system)
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a PC card, find
the solution in the chart to the right.
If you cannot clear the error
message, take your vehicle to your
dealer.
Error Message
FILE ERROR
NO MUSIC
MEDIA ERROR
Solution
The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. There is a
possibility that the files have been damaged.
It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMA files in
the PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.
It appears when the unsupported PC card is inserted. The system supports
CF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisc 6-in-1 Card Adapter.
210
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:02:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0216
Table Of Contents
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Features
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
CONTINUED
211
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:02:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0217
Table Of Contents
AM/FM Radio Reception
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
212
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:02:53
Main Menu
31SWA610
0218
Table Of Contents
Protecting Your Discs
General Information
When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,
use only high quality discs labeled
for audio use.
Play only standard, round, 5-inch
(12 cm) discs. Smaller or oddshaped discs may jam in the drive
or cause other problems.
Handle your discs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new disc may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the
recording surface of the disc,
causing skipping or other problems.
Remove these pieces by rubbing the
inner and outer edges with the side
of a pencil or pen.
Features
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the
system.
Protecting Discs
When a disc is not being played,
store it in its case to protect it from
dust and other contamination. To
prevent warpage, keep discs out of
direct sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a disc by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the disc.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the disc to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the system or the magazine.
213
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:03:04
Main Menu
31SWA610
0219
Table Of Contents
Protecting Your Discs
Additional Information of
Recommended Discs
The disc player/changer has a
sophisticated and delicate
mechanism. If you insert a damaged
disc as indicated in this section, it
may become stuck inside and
damage the audio unit.
Examples of these discs are shown
to the right:
1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
2. Damaged discs
Chipped/
Cracked
Using Printer
Label Kit
Sealed
3. Poor quality discs
Warped
214
2008 CR- V
Burrs
With Plastic
Ring
07/07/25
15:03:14
Main Menu
31SWA610
0220
Table Of Contents
Protecting Your Discs
4. Small, irregular shaped discs
5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs
Recommended discs are printed
with the following logo.
Features
3-inch (8-cm) CD
Triangle Shape
Fingerprints, scratches, etc.
Audio unit may not play the
following formats.
CD-R or CD-RW may not play due
to the recording conditions.
Scratches and fingerprints on the
discs may cause the sound to skip.
Can Shape
Arrow Shape
215
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:03:21
Main Menu
31SWA610
0221
Table Of Contents
Remote Audio Controls
MODE BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
CH BUTTON
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
disc, a PC card, or CD changer (if a
disc(s) or a PC card is loaded). On
models with satellite radio system,
you can also select XM1 and XM2.
On EX, and EX-L models
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (+) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
(−) to go back to the previous
station. If you press and hold the CH
button (+) or (−), the system goes
into the seek mode. It finds a station
with a strong signal.
216
2008 CR- V
If you are playing a disc, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track (file in MP3 or WMA format)
each time you press the top (+) of
the CH button. Press the bottom
(−) to return to the beginning of the
current track/file. Press it twice to
return to the previous track/file.
You will see the track/file number
and the elapsed time. If the disc has
text data or is compressed in MP3 or
WMA, you can also see any other
information (track title, file name,
folder name, etc.).
07/07/25
15:03:29
Main Menu
31SWA610
0222
Table Of Contents
Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit
In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use
the seek function to select folders.
Press and hold the top (+) of the
CH button until you hear a beep, to
skip forward to the first file of the
next folder. Press the bottom (−) to
skip backward to the previous folder.
Auxiliary Input Jack
Features
On Navigation model
If you are playing a PC card, press
the top (+) of the CH button to
advance to the next file. Press the
bottom (−) to go back to the
previous file.
EX-L model
LX model
Your vehicle has the auxiliary input
jack on the front panel, on the center
table, or in the console compartment,
depending on models. The system
will accept auxiliary input from
standard audio accessories.
When a compatible audio unit is
connected to the jack, press the AUX
button to select it.
EX model
217
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:03:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0223
Table Of Contents
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific digit code using the
preset buttons (icon on vehicle’s with
navigation system). Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from specific
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
next time you turn on the system.
Use the preset buttons to enter the
code. On vehicles with navigation
system, touch the icon to enter the
code number, then touch the Done
icon to set the code. The code is on
the radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have 10 tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in 10 attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
218
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:03:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0224
Table Of Contents
Setting the Clock
On models without navigation system
To set the time, press the CLOCK
button until you hear a beep. The
displayed time begins to blink.
LX model
EX and EX-L models without
navigation system
CLOCK BUTTON
(A.SEL side of the A.SEL/SCAN bar)
CLOCK BUTTON (AM)
Press the CLOCK button again to
enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, press and hold
the CLOCK button, then press the R
button to set the time back to the
previous hour. If the displayed time
is after the half hour, the same
procedure sets the time forward to
the beginning of the next hour.
Features
Change the hours by pressing the H
(hour) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(minute) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time.
HOUR BUTTON
(PRESET 4)
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 6)
MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 5)
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
RESET BUTTON
(PRESET 3)
HOUR BUTTON MINUTE BUTTON
(PRESET 2)
(PRESET 1)
On models with navigation system
The navigation system receives
signals from the global positioning
system (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
219
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:03:52
Main Menu
31SWA610
0225
Table Of Contents
Security System
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any of the
doors are not fully closed. If the
system will not set, check the doors
and the tailgate. You can also check
the open monitor on the instrument
panel (see page 63 ), to see if the
doors and the tailgate are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
If equipped
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then
the system resets. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or use the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from the
outside with the key, driver’s lock
tab, door lock master switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system indicator on the instrument
panel starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Once the security system is set,
opening any door without using the
key or the remote transmitter, the
hood, or the tailgate will cause the
system to alarm.
NOTE: Use the remote transmitter
to quickly check that the hood, the
tailgate, and all doors are closed.
Push the lock button twice within 5
seconds. There should be an audible
confirmation beep.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
220
2008 CR- V
07/07/26
17:10:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0226
Table Of Contents
Rearview Camera and Monitor
On EX-L model with navigation system
When in reverse, the touch screen
and navigation system ‘‘hard’’
buttons are locked out, except the
‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘▼’’
or ‘‘▲’’ button allows you to adjust
the brightness of the rearview
camera image.
Features
The camera brightness cannot be
adjusted by voice control.
Whenever you shift to reverse (R)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation system screen.
Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
221
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:04:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0227
Table Of Contents
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Using the Cruise Control
RES/ACCEL
CRUISE
BUTTON
CANCEL SET/DECEL
1. Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel comes on.
The cruise control system can be
left on, even when it is not in use.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
222
2008 CR- V
3. Press and release the SET/
DECEL button on the steering
wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator on the instrument panel
comes on to show the system is
now activated.
07/07/25
15:04:17
Main Menu
31SWA610
0228
Table Of Contents
Cruise Control
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
NOTE: If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, use the brakes as you
normally would.
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel goes out. When
the vehicle slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/DECEL
button.
CONTINUED
223
2008 CR- V
Features
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your vehicle speed
increases going down a hill, use the
brakes to slow down. This will cancel
the cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
07/07/25
15:04:24
Main Menu
31SWA610
0229
Table Of Contents
Cruise Control
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
Canceling Cruise Control
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Resuming the Set Speed
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the system
remembers the previously set speed.
To return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), and then
press and release the RES/ACCEL
button. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator comes on. The vehicle
accelerates to the same speed as
before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
224
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:04:28
31SWA610
0230
Main Menu
Before Driving
Break-in Period .............................. 226
Fuel Recommendation .................. 226
Service Station Procedures .......... 227
Refueling..................................... 227
Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 228
Opening and Closing
the Hood ................................. 229
Oil Check .................................... 230
Engine Coolant Check .............. 230
Fuel Economy ................................ 231
Accessories and Modifications .... 234
Carrying Cargo .............................. 236
225
2008 CR- V
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
07/07/25
15:04:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0231
Table Of Contents
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoid hard braking for the first
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Fuel Recommendation
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommended using a quality
gasoline containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
226
2008 CR- V
your authorized dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
Quick Start Guide.
07/07/25
15:04:48
Main Menu
31SWA610
0232
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
TETHER
CONTINUED
227
2008 CR- V
Before Driving
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Place the
cap in the holder on the fuel fill
door.
07/07/25
15:04:55
Main Menu
31SWA610
0233
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
may come on (see page 325 ). You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
Check Fuel Cap Message
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle’s onboard diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
228
2008 CR- V
If the system still detects a leak in
your vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page 325 .
07/07/25
15:05:04
Main Menu
31SWA610
0234
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
GRIP
LATCH
SUPPORT ROD
1. Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
2. Reach in between the hood and
the front grille with your fingers.
The hood latch handle is above
the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle up
until it releases the hood. Lift the
hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
3. Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole pointed
by an arrow in the hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
229
2008 CR- V
Before Driving
CLIP
07/07/25
15:05:15
Main Menu
31SWA610
0235
Table Of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Engine Coolant Check
DIPSTICK
RESERVE TANK
MAX
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MIN
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Engine Oil on page 281 .
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 284 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
Checks on page 278 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
230
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:05:24
Main Menu
31SWA610
0236
Table Of Contents
Fuel Economy
Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel
Economy Estimates Comparison.
Fuel economy is not a fixed number.
It varies based on driving conditions,
driving habits and vehicle condition.
Therefore, it is not possible for one
set of estimates to predict fuel
economy precisely for all drivers in
all environments.
City MPG − Represents urban
driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A
range of miles per gallon achieved is
also provided.
Highway MPG
Combined Fuel
Economy
Estimated Annual
Fuel Cost
(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)
achieved is also provided.
Combined Fuel Economy −
Represents a combination of city and
highway driving. The scale
represents the range of combined
fuel economy for other vehicles in
the class.
Highway MPG − Represents a
mixture of rural and interstate
driving, in a warmed-up vehicle,
typical of longer trips in free-flowing
traffic. A range of miles per gallon
Estimated Annual Fuel Cost −
Provides an estimated annual fuel
cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000
km) per year multiplied by the cost
per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost
data) divided by the combined fuel
economy.
For more information on fuel
economy ratings and factors that
affect fuel economy, visit www.
fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.
vehicles.gc.ca)
231
2008 CR- V
Before Driving
The EPA fuel economy estimates
shown in the example to the right
are a useful tool for comparison
when buying a vehicle. EPA
estimates include:
City MPG
07/07/25
15:05:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0237
Table Of Contents
Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy Factors
The following factors can lower your
vehicle’s fuel economy:
Aggressive driving (hard
acceleration and braking)
Excessive idling, accelerating and
braking in stop-and-go traffic
Cold engine operation (engines
are more efficient when warmed
up)
Driving with a heavy load or the
air conditioner running
Improperly inflated tires
Improving Fuel Economy
Vehicle Maintenance
A properly maintained vehicle
maximizes fuel economy. Poor
maintenance can significantly reduce
fuel economy. Always maintain your
vehicle according to the maintenance
messages displayed on the multiinformation display (see Owner’s
Maintenance Checks on page 278 ).
For example:
Use the recommended viscosity
motor oil, displaying the API
Certification Seal (see page
281).
Maintain proper tire inflation
− An under-inflated tire increases
‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reduces
fuel economy.
Avoid carrying excess weight in
your vehicle − It puts a heavier
load on the engine, increasing fuel
consumption.
Keep your vehicle clean − In
particular, a build-up of snow or
mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
economy.
Drive Efficiently
Drive moderately − Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking increase fuel
consumption.
232
2008 CR- V
Observe the speed limit −
Aerodynamic drag has a big effect
on fuel mileage at speeds above 45
mph (75 km/h). Reduce your
speed and you reduce the drag.
Trailers, car top carriers, roof
racks and bike racks are also big
contributors to increased drag.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible − If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, you can
boost your fuel economy by up
shifting as early as possible.
Avoid excessive idling − Idling
results in 0 miles per gallon.
07/07/25
15:05:47
Main Menu
31SWA610
0238
Table Of Contents
Fuel Economy
Checking Your Fuel Economy
Miles
driven
Gallons
of fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
Calculating Fuel Economy
Before Driving
Minimize the use of the air
conditioning system − The A/C
puts an extra load on the engine
which makes it use more fuel. Use
the fresh-air ventilation when
possible.
Plan and combine trips −
Combine several short trips into
one. A warmed-up engine is more
fuel efficient than a cold one.
L per
100 km
Measuring Techniques
Direct calculation is the
recommended source of information
about your actual fuel economy.
Using frequency of fill-ups or taking
fuel gauge readings are NOT
accurate measures of fuel economy.
Fuel economy may improve over the
first several thousand miles.
1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.
2) Reset trip counter to zero.
3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.
4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.
233
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:05:55
Main Menu
31SWA610
0239
Table Of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Before installing any accessory:
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and
tire pressure monitoring system.
234
2008 CR- V
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 327 ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. Accessories installed in
these areas may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
07/07/25
15:06:02
Main Menu
31SWA610
0240
Table Of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components, and are not
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Here are some examples:
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Lowering the vehicle with a nonHonda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Before Driving
Modifying Your Vehicle
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components, with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
235
2008 CR- V
07/07/26
17:10:58
Main Menu
31SWA610
0241
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
DUAL DECK CARGO SHELF*
DOOR POCKETS
UPPER GLOVE BOX
CARGO AREA
SEAT-BACK POCKETS*
SEAT UNDER TRAY*
*
CENTER CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
LOWER
GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
* : If equipped
236
2008 CR- V
Upper glove box
Lower glove box
Console compartment
Door pockets
Seat-back pockets
Seat-under tray (if equipped)
Center pocket
Cargo area, including the rear
seats when folded up or down.
Upper and lower cargo areas with
the dual deck cargo shelf (if
equipped)
Roof-rack (if equipped)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
07/07/25
15:06:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0242
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,
and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
Label Example
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit −
(1)Locate the statement ‘‘The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passenger that
will be riding in your vehicle.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if
you are towing a trailer.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(5)Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
CONTINUED
237
2008 CR- V
Before Driving
See Tire And Loading Information
label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
(4)The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.
(1,400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
07/07/25
15:06:32
Main Menu
31SWA610
0243
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Example 1
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(550 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(250 lbs)
Max Load (850 lbs)
Passenger Weight
(150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)
Cargo Weight
(100 lbs)
Example 2
Example 3
238
2008 CR- V
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
are on a label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
07/07/25
15:06:40
Main Menu
31SWA610
0244
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
On all models except LX
Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
with any rear seat folded up or down.
Keep the lower glove box closed
while driving. If it is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
Do not stack items higher than the
back of the rear seats. They can
block your view and be thrown
around the vehicle during a crash.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 54 .
CONTINUED
239
2008 CR- V
Before Driving
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
underneath and interfere with the
proper operation of the seats, the
sensors under the seats, or the
driver’s ability to operate the
pedals.
If you fold the rear seats up or
down, tie down items that could be
thrown about the vehicle during a
crash or sudden stop. Also, keep
all cargo below the bottom of the
windows. If it is higher, it could
interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
07/07/25
15:06:47
Main Menu
31SWA610
0245
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Carrying Cargo on the Dual Deck
Cargo Shelf
On all models except LX
On U.S. model is shown
Do not put any items on the dual
deck cargo shelf that could block
your view or be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
Do not use the dual deck cargo shelf
if the rear seats are folded down.
Do not exceed the dual deck cargo
shelf load limit of 20 lbs on U.S.
models, and 10 kg on Canadian
models.
240
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:06:54
Main Menu
31SWA610
0246
Table Of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net
The separation net can be used to
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
Cargo Hooks
HOOK
Before Driving
The four hooks on the floor can be
used to install a net for securing
items.
On LX model
Your vehicle also has cargo hooks on
side panel in the cargo area.
They are designed to hold light
items. Heavy objects may damage
the hook. Make sure any items put
on each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs
(3 kg).
241
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:06:56
Main Menu
31SWA610
0247
Table Of Contents
242
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:07:00
31SWA610
0248
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the vehicle stability assist
(VSA) system, the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) and facts
you need if you are planning to tow a
trailer or drive off-highway.
243
2008 CR- V
Driving
Driving Guidelines ......................... 244
Preparing to Drive ..................... 245
Starting the Engine........................ 246
Automatic Transmission............... 247
Parking ............................................ 252
Braking System.............................. 253
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 254
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System............................. 256
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ....................................... 258
Towing a Trailer ............................ 261
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome................................. 266
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 268
07/07/25
15:07:09
Main Menu
31SWA610
0249
Table Of Contents
Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
Four-wheel drive models
Your vehicle is equipped with a fourwheel drive (4WD) system. When
the system senses a loss of frontwheel traction, it automatically
transfers some power to the rear
wheels. This gives you better
traction and mobility.
You still need to exercise the same
care when accelerating, steering, and
braking that you would in a twowheel drive vehicle.
See page 268 for off-highway driving
guidelines.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
244
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:07:19
Main Menu
31SWA610
0250
Table Of Contents
Driving Guidelines
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
2. Check that the hood is fully closed.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 111 ).
7. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 79 ).
8. Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
Driving
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page 302 ).
5. Check the seat adjustment (see
page 95 ).
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 14 ).
10. When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page 59 ).
245
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:07:26
31SWA610
Main Menu
0251
Table Of Contents
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 80 .
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
246
2008 CR- V
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
07/07/25
15:07:33
Main Menu
31SWA610
0252
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Shifting
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LEVER
To shift from any position, press
firmly on the brake pedal and press
the release button on the side of the
shift lever. You cannot shift out of
Park when the ignition switch is in
the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
position.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
CONTINUED
247
2008 CR- V
Driving
U.S. model is shown
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
07/07/25
15:07:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0253
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
To shift from:
P to R
R to P
N to R
D to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D
D to N
N to D
R to N
D3 to D
D to D3
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button.
Press the shift lever release
button.
Move the shift lever.
Press the D3 button.
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
page 251 .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. You must also press the
release button to shift into Park. The
shift lever must be in Park before
you can remove the key from the
ignition switch.
248
2008 CR- V
Reverse (R) − Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the side of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
complete stop and then shift. Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
07/07/25
15:07:47
Main Menu
31SWA610
0254
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
D3 SWITCH
Press the D3 switch on the side of
the shift lever to turn this mode on
or off; the D3 mode indicator comes
on whenever the D3 mode is
selected.
D3 mode can be turned on or off
only when the ignition switch is in
the ON (II) position and the shift
lever is in the D position.
D3 MODE INDICATOR
When the D3 mode is on, the
transmission selects only the first
three gears. Use D3 mode when
towing a trailer, or to provide engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
D3 mode can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
CONTINUED
249
2008 CR- V
Driving
Drive (D) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
D3 Mode
07/07/25
15:07:57
Main Menu
31SWA610
0255
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shifting out from the D position will
cancel the D3 mode, and the D3
indicator will go out. Selecting the D
position again will resume the D3
mode and the indicator comes on.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position turns this mode
off. When you restart the engine,
select the D position and press the
D3 mode switch again to use this
mode.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
The D3 mode indicator also comes
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Second (2) − To shift to second,
press the release button on the side
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
First (1) − To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D3, and D, you can
operate the transmission much like a
manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
250
2008 CR- V
If you shift into first position when
the vehicle speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h), the transmission shifts
into second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
07/07/25
15:08:06
Main Menu
31SWA610
0256
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
COVER
RELEASE BUTTON
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
4. Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
5. Push down on the key while you
press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
6. Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the right side. Press
the brake pedal, and restart the
engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
251
2008 CR- V
Driving
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the edge of the cover to remove
it.
07/07/25
15:08:16
Main Menu
31SWA610
0257
Table Of Contents
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors and the tailgate.
On EX and EX-L models
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
252
2008 CR- V
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
07/07/25
15:08:24
Main Menu
31SWA610
0258
Table Of Contents
Braking System
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
Braking System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Brake Pad Wear Indicators
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake wear
indicators.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
253
2008 CR- V
Driving
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness
and reduces brake pad life. In
addition, fuel economy can be
reduced. It also keeps your brake
lights on all the time, confusing
drivers behind you.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious and alert in your driving.
07/07/25
15:08:30
Main Menu
31SWA610
0259
Table Of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the wheels from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The electronic brake distribution
(EBD) system, which is part of the
ABS, also balances the front-to-rear
braking distribution according to
vehicle loading.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before the
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS Indicator
If this indicator comes on, the antilock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as shown on
page 326 .
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
254
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:08:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0260
Table Of Contents
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page 326 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
The VSA indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock.
Driving
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the EBD system may also
be shut down.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
255
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:08:47
Main Menu
31SWA610
0261
Table Of Contents
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output and
by selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some noise from the VSA
hydraulic system. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink.
VSA Activation Indicator
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
If this indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays on or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 257 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA off switch again.
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
256
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:08:55
Main Menu
31SWA610
0262
Table Of Contents
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch
VSA OFF SWITCH
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Press and hold the switch again. It
turns the system back on.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 307 ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
257
2008 CR- V
Driving
This switch is under the driver’s side
vent. To turn the VSA system on and
off, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
07/07/25
15:09:03
Main Menu
31SWA610
0263
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor (not including the spare tire).
If the air pressure of a tire becomes
significantly low while driving, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator to come on.
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
When the low tire pressure indicator
is on, one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 312 ).
If you cannot make the low tire
pressure indicator go out after
inflating the tires to the specified
values, have your dealer check the
system as soon as possible.
258
2008 CR- V
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Because tire pressure varies by
temperature and other conditions,
the low tire pressure indicator may
come on unexpectedly.
07/07/25
15:09:11
Main Menu
31SWA610
0264
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Refer to page 302 for tire inflation
guidelines.
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
the tire pressures monthly.
information label and in the owner’s
manual (see page 303 ).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
When you restart the vehicle with
the compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator may also come on and stay
on after driving several miles
(kilometers).
If this happens, the system will shut
off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
Driving
For example, if you check and fill
your tires in a warm area, then drive
in extremely cold weather, the tire
pressure will be lower than
measured and could be underinflated
and cause the low tire pressure
indicator to come on. Or, if you
check and adjust your tire pressure
in cooler conditions, and drive into
extremely hot conditions, the tire
may become overinflated. However,
the low tire pressure indicator will
not come on if the tires are
overinflated.
If the low tire pressure indicator or
TPMS indicator comes on, the VSA
system automatically turns on even if
the VSA system is turned off by
pressing the VSA OFF switch (see
page 257 ). If this happens, you
cannot turn the VSA system off by
pressing the VSA off switch again.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold, and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified on the tire
259
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:09:19
Main Menu
31SWA610
0265
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Changing a Tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure indicator will come on.
Replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire (see page 312 ).
Each wheel (except the compact
spare tire wheel) is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor mounted inside
the tire behind the valve stem. You
must use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
The low tire pressure indicator or
the TPMS indicator will go off, after
several miles (kilometers) driving,
when you replace the spare tire with
the specified regular tire equipped
with the tire pressure monitor sensor.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.
After you replace the flat tire with
the compact spare tire, the low tire
pressure indicator stays on. This is
normal; the system is not monitoring
the spare tire pressure. Manually
check the spare tire pressure to be
sure it is correct. After several miles
(kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low tire
pressure indicator goes off.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
260
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:09:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0266
Table Of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can also use it to
tow a trailer if you carefully observe
the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Break-In Period
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Be sure to read the Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines section on page
268 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Total Trailer Weight: The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
CONTINUED
261
2008 CR- V
Driving
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page 226 ).
Load Limits
07/07/25
15:09:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0267
Table Of Contents
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60% of the load
toward the front of the trailer and
40% toward the rear, then re-adjust
the load as needed.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load is 4,560 lbs
(2,070 kg).
Tongue Load: The weight that the
tongue of a fully-loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight. Too
much tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo,
and the tongue load must not exceed
2,310 lbs (1,050 kg) on the front axle,
and 2,290 lbs (1,040 kg) on the rear
axle.
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) − The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 6,060 lbs (2,750
kg)
262
2008 CR- V
Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that all
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale. For public
scales in your area, check your local
phone book, or contact your trailer
dealer or rental agency for
assistance.
If you cannot get to a public scale,
you can estimate the total trailer
weight by adding the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the
manufacturer) with everything in or
on the trailer.
If you normally pull the same load
each time you tow a trailer, you can
use a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge to check the
tongue load the first time you set up
a towing combination (a fully loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
07/07/25
15:09:44
Main Menu
31SWA610
0268
Table Of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Hitches
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) or
more be equipped with its own
electric or surge-type brakes.
Trailer Lights
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state/province,
and local regulations. Check with
your local trailer sales or rental
agencies for the requirements in the
area where you plan to tow, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicles hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Driving
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and maintained, and that it
meets federal, state, province, and
local regulations.
Safety Chains
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
See your trailer dealer or rental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
CONTINUED
263
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:09:54
31SWA610
Main Menu
0269
Table Of Contents
Towing a Trailer
TAILLIGHT
(RED)
LEFT TURN
SIGNAL
(ORANGE)
GROUND
(BLACK)
TRAILER BRAKE HAZARD
(WHITE) LIGHT (PINK)
(LIGHT
GREEN)
RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
(BROWN)
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the left
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
the drawing above for the wiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Additional Towing Equipment
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
264
2008 CR- V
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the suspension and
the cooling system are in good
operating condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
07/07/25
15:10:05
Main Menu
31SWA610
0270
Table Of Contents
Towing a Trailer
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
in this section.
Making Turns and Braking
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Driving on Hills
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and use the D3 position.
Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause the trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
265
2008 CR- V
Driving
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Towing Speeds and Gears
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. D3 is the
proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the
following column for additional gear
information.)
07/07/25
15:10:15
Main Menu
31SWA610
0271
Table Of Contents
Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Parking
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome
Your vehicle can be towed behind a
motorhome at legal highway speeds
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Otherwise, severe transmission
damage will occur. To avoid damage
to the 4WD system, your vehicle
must be towed with all four wheels
on the ground (flat towing).
When purchasing a tow bar, make
sure you select a reputable
manufacturer and installer. Follow
the manufacturer’s attachment
instructions carefully.
Perform the following procedure
every day immediately before you
begin towing. Otherwise severe
automatic transmission damage will
occur.
266
2008 CR- V
Check the transmission fluid level
(see page 287 ). Do not overfill.
Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.
Shift to D position and hold for 5
seconds, then to N. Let the engine
run for 3 minutes, then turn it off.
Release the parking brake.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
sockets are turned off so you do
not run down the battery.
07/07/25
15:10:23
Main Menu
31SWA610
0272
Table Of Contents
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
towing.
Extended Towing
When towing your vehicle for long
periods, remove the 7.5 A Accessory
Radio fuse to reduce drain on battery.
This fuse is located in the interior
fuse box and is shown as number 34
below.
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
ACCESSORY RADIO FUSE
Failure to f ollow the recommended
instructions exactly will result in severe
automatic transmission damage. If you
cannot shif t the transmission or start
the engine, your vehicle must be
transported on a f lat-bed truck or
trailer.
Severe transmission damage will occur
if the vehicle is shif ted f rom reverse to
neutral and then towed with the drive
wheels on the ground.
If you tow a CR-V behind a
motorhome, the transmission fluid
must be changed every 2 years or
30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever
comes first.
Only remove the fuse after you have
performed the transmission shifting
procedure, and the key is in the
ACCESSORY (I) position. Store the
fuse in an obvious location (center
tray, coin pockets, etc) as a reminder
to re-install the fuse before driving
267
2008 CR- V
Driving
If you tow more than 8 hours in one
day, you should repeat the above
procedure at least every 8 hours
(when you stop for fuel, etc.)
the vehicle.
07/07/25
15:10:32
Main Menu
31SWA610
0273
Table Of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic
sites, and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging offroad activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. So be sure to read this
owner’s manual, pay special attention
to the precautions and tips in this
section, and get acquainted with
your vehicle before you leave the
pavement.
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be sure to store cargo properly
and do not exceed your cargo load
limits (see page 237 and 262 ).
Wherever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
268
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:10:43
Main Menu
31SWA610
0274
Table Of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Check Out Your Vehicle
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
Remember
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
Avoiding Obstacles
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.
Driving on Slopes
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue, do not try to
turn around. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
269
2008 CR- V
Driving
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
Accelerating and Braking
For better traction on all surfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
07/07/25
15:10:50
Main Menu
31SWA610
0275
Table Of Contents
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Crossing a Stream
Avoid driving through deep water. If
you encounter water in your route (a
small stream or large puddle, for
example), evaluate it carefully before
going ahead. Make sure it is shallow,
flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of
the depth or the ground, turn around
and find another route.
Driving through deep water can also
damage your vehicle. The water can
get into the transmission and
differential, diluting the lubricant
and causing an eventual failure. It
can also wash the grease out of the
wheel bearings.
If You Get Stuck
Avoid driving on soft sand, deep mud,
or other surfaces where you could
get stuck. If you do happen to get
stuck because of inclement weather
or other conditions, choose a safe
and appropriate course of action.
You should never use a jack to try
getting unstuck. A jack only works
on firm, level ground. Also, your
vehicle could easily slip off the jack
and hurt you or someone else.
270
2008 CR- V
4-Wheel Drive Vehicles
If you spin the wheels excessively
trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat the components of the
4-wheel drive system. If this happens,
the 4-wheel drive system shuts off
and only the front wheels receive
power. If this happens, stop and
allow everything to cool down. The
4-wheel drive system will work again
after its temperature drops.
If you slip the clutch for a long time
while trying to get unstuck, you may
overheat and damage it.
07/07/25
15:10:55
31SWA610
0276
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance minder messages on
the information display, and
instructions for simple maintenance
tasks you may want to take care of
yourself.
271
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page 353 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 272
Maintenance Minder ..................... 273
Fluid Locations............................... 280
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 281
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter ............................................ 282
Engine Coolant ............................... 284
Windshield Washers ..................... 286
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 287
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 289
Brake Fluid ..................................... 289
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 290
Lights .............................................. 291
Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 297
Floor Mats ...................................... 297
Audio Antenna ............................... 298
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 298
Wiper Blades .................................. 299
Tires ................................................ 302
Wheels ............................................ 308
Checking the Battery .................... 308
Vehicle Storage .............................. 310
07/07/25
15:11:04
Main Menu
31SWA610
0277
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust. Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
272
2008 CR- V
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
07/07/25
15:11:12
Main Menu
31SWA610
0278
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer do
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service.
Engine Oil Life Display
SELECT/RESET KNOB
Based on the engine operating
conditions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 %−91 %
90 %−81 %
80 %−71 %
70 %−61 %
60 %−51 %
50 %−41 %
40 %−31 %
30 %−21 %
20 %−16 %
15 %−11 %
10 %−6 %
5 %−1 %
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
CONTINUED
273
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, then press and release
the select/reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life indicator
appears (see page 66 ).
The remaining engine oil life is
shown on the display according to
this table:
07/07/25
15:11:18
Main Menu
31SWA610
0279
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR
ENGINE LIFE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE (S)
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
below the engine oil life indicator.
The 15 and 10 percent oil life
indicator reminds you that the time
is coming soon to take your vehicle
in for the required maintenance.
274
2008 CR- V
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with the
same maintenance item code(s),
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
07/07/25
15:11:28
Main Menu
31SWA610
0280
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page 279 ).
You can switch the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer or the
average fuel mileage, press and
release the select/reset knob on the
instrument panel.
When you see this message, have
the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as
possible.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
every time you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. The
maintenance minder indicator
(
) also comes on and remains
on in the instrument panel. When
you see this message, immediately
have the indicated maintenance done
by your dealer.
If you do not perform the indicated
maintenance, negative mileage is
displayed and begins to blink after
the vehicle has been driven 10 miles
(10 km) or more.
Negative mileage means your
vehicle has passed the maintenance
required point.
Immediately have the indicated
maintenance done by your dealer.
CONTINUED
275
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
When the engine oil life is 15 to 1
percent, the maintenance minder
indicator (
) comes on every
time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, then it goes out
if you switch the information display.
07/07/25
15:11:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0281
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
To change the information display
from the engine oil life display to the
odometer or the average fuel
mileage, press and release the
select/reset knob.
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
(
) remains on even if you
change the information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described as follows.
SUB ITEM (S)
MAIN ITEM
All maintenance items displayed on
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page 279 .
276
2008 CR- V
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
2. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
is displayed.
07/07/25
15:11:47
Main Menu
31SWA610
0282
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
can lead to serious mechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
EX and EX-L model
4. Select the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ indicator by
turning the select/reset knob. The
display begins to blink. Push the
same knob to enter this setting.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
5. The engine oil life and the
maintenance item code(s) will
begin to blink. Push the select/
reset knob to reset.
6. The maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
CONTINUED
277
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
3. Press the select/reset knob for
about 10 seconds. The information
display shows the reset mode
initial display as shown.
07/07/25
15:11:57
Main Menu
31SWA610
0283
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out your
Honda Service History or Canadian
Maintenance Log. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance,
replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and
systems may be done by any
automotive repair establishment
or individual using parts that are
‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 230 .
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
287 .
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
278
2008 CR- V
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 230 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 289 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
302 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate light monthly.
See page 291 .
07/07/25
15:12:05
Main Menu
31SWA610
0284
Table Of Contents
Maintenance Minder
Symbol
A
B
Symbol
1
2
3
* 1 : If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 278 .
NOTE:
Independent of the maintenance items in the information display, replace
the brake fluid every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
4
5
6
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000
miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
If you tow a CR-V behind a motorhome, the
transmission fluid must be changed every 2 years
or 30,000 miles (48,000 km), whichever comes first.
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace rear differential fluid*2
* 2 : 4WD
279
2008 CR- V
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
07/07/25
15:12:08
Main Menu
31SWA610
0285
Table Of Contents
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
BRAKE FLUID
(Black cap)
ENGINE OIL
DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID
(Red cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
RADIATOR CAP
280
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:12:16
Main Menu
31SWA610
0286
Table Of Contents
Adding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level on
the engine oil dipstick. Do not fill
Ambient Temperature
281
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
07/07/25
15:12:25
Main Menu
31SWA610
0287
Table Of Contents
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Changing the Engine Oil and
Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service stationtype hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
282
2008 CR- V
WASHER
OIL DRAIN BOLT
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
2. Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
07/07/25
15:12:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0288
Table Of Contents
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER
6. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
7. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4. Make sure the oil filter gasket is
not stuck to the engine block. If it
is, remove it before installing a
new oil filter.
5. Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
8. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Maintenance
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
9. Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
10.Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
283
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:12:41
Main Menu
31SWA610
0289
Table Of Contents
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
284
2008 CR- V
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
07/07/25
15:12:49
Main Menu
31SWA610
0290
Table Of Contents
Engine Coolant
RADIATOR CAP
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
2. Relieve any pressure in the cooling
system by turning the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without
pressing down.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing it down and turning it
counterclockwise.
285
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:12:55
Main Menu
31SWA610
0291
Table Of Contents
Windshield Washers
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
LEVEL GAUGE
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Check the fluid level by removing
the cap and looking at the level
gauge.
On Canadian models: The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page 65 ).
286
2008 CR- V
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid.
07/07/25
15:13:05
Main Menu
31SWA610
0292
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission Fluid
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
DIPSTICK
UPPER
MARK
LOWER
MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine, let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds (but
no longer than 90 seconds) before
doing step 2.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid).
CONTINUED
287
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the level
between the upper and lower
marks.
07/07/25
15:13:11
Main Menu
31SWA610
0293
Table Of Contents
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do
not mix with other transmission f luids.
Using transmission f luid other than
Honda Genuine ATF-Z1 may cause
deterioration in transmission operation
and durability, and could result in
damage to the transmission.
Damage resulting f rom the use of
transmission f luid other than Honda
Genuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by the
Honda new vehicle warranty.
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
288
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:13:20
Main Menu
31SWA610
0294
Table Of Contents
Rear Differential Fluid, Brake Fluid
Rear Differential Fluid
4WD model only
The rear differential should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. Have your dealer replace the
rear differential fluid.
Use Honda Dual Pump Fluid II only.
Do not use automatic transmission
fluid (ATF).
Brake Fluid
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
MAX
Replace the brake fluid according to
the maintenance messages shown on
the information display.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
289
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
07/07/25
15:13:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0295
Table Of Contents
Power Steering Fluid
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
290
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:13:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0296
Table Of Contents
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustments should be done by your
dealer or other qualified technician.
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
1. Open the hood.
To change the headlight bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
under-hood fuse box from its stay
by pulling it out.
CONTINUED
291
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
07/07/25
15:13:42
Main Menu
31SWA610
0297
Table Of Contents
Lights
5. Install the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into
the slot.
6. Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure one of the three arrows
on the rubber seal is facing up; it is
marked ‘‘→.’’
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
7. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the
headlights to test the new bulb.
3. Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
8. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the under-hood fuse box.
4. Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
292
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:13:51
Main Menu
31SWA610
0298
Table Of Contents
Lights
4. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Light Bulb
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
6. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the coolant reserve tank.
To change the turn signal bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
engine coolant reserve tank by
pulling it out of its holder.
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
293
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:14:00
Main Menu
31SWA610
0299
Table Of Contents
Lights
4. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Replacing a Parking Light/Front
Side Marker Light Bulb
FUSE BOX
5. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
6. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the fuse box in place
securely.
On the passenger’s side
1. Open the hood.
To change the parking light/front
side marker on the driver’s side,
remove the fuse box from its stay
by pulling out.
2. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
294
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:14:09
Main Menu
31SWA610
0300
Table Of Contents
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs
BULBS
COVER
SCREWS
BULBS
2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the taillight assembly
mounting screw under each cover.
3. Pull the taillight assembly out of
the rear pillar.
4. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, backup light, turn signal, or side
marker.
5. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
295
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover. Remove the
covers by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tip
screwdriver.
07/07/25
15:14:18
Main Menu
31SWA610
0301
Table Of Contents
Lights
6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
7. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
8. Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
9. Align the clips on the taillight
assembly with the holes in the
body, then push the taillight
assembly into place. Tighten the
two mounting screws securely and
reinstall the covers.
1. Open the tailgate.
Unlatch the top of the cover by
pulling back on it with your hands.
2. Place a cloth on the side edge of
the cover. Remove the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a
small flat-tip screwdriver and
pulling the cover off.
3. Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
296
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:14:28
Main Menu
31SWA610
0302
Table Of Contents
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Cleaning the Seat Belts
Floor Mats
LOOP
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
CONTINUED
297
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
5. Press the brake pedal to make
sure the new bulb is working.
6. Put the socket back into the light
assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Put the cover back on the light
assembly. Push it in until it locks
in place.
07/07/25
15:14:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0303
Table Of Contents
Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
to re-anchor it when you put it back
in your vehicle.
Audio Antenna
If you use a non-Honda floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna at the rear of the roof . Bef ore
using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car wash,
remove the antenna by unscrewing it by
hand. This prevents the antenna f rom
being damaged by the car wash brushes.
298
2008 CR- V
Dust and Pollen Filter
This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air, or if the flow from
the heating and cooling system
becomes less than usual.
07/07/25
15:14:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0304
Table Of Contents
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage
the hood and the wiper arms.
When replacing a wiper blade,
make sure not to drop the wiper
blade or wiper arm down on the
windshield.
BLADE
FRONT
WIPER ARMS
To replace a front wiper blade:
1. Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm:
3. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Press and hold the lock tab.
Slide the blade assembly toward
the lock tab until it releases from
the wiper arm.
CONTINUED
299
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
LOCK TAB
07/07/25
15:14:52
Main Menu
31SWA610
0305
Table Of Contents
Wiper Blades
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
REINFORCEMENT
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
BLADE
TOP
5. Place the top of the wiper blade on
the end of the blade assembly, and
slide the blade onto the assembly
in the direction pointed to by the
arrow.
Make sure the blade is completely
installed.
Make sure the three rubber tabs
inside the blade fit to each notch
of the reinforcement, as shown.
300
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:15:02
Main Menu
31SWA610
0306
Table Of Contents
Wiper Blades
5. Slide the new blade into the holder.
Make sure it is engaged in the slot
along its full length.
Insert both ends of the blade into
the holder. Make sure they are
secure.
REAR
6. Install the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm against the
windshield.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pivoting the
blade assembly upward.
3. Pull one end of the blade out from
the holder.
Slide the blade out of the holder.
Maintenance
To replace a rear wiper blade:
4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
301
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:15:10
Main Menu
31SWA610
0307
Table Of Contents
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Inflation Guidelines
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicle ride more harshly, are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
302
2008 CR- V
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) warns you when a tire
pressure is low. See page 258 for
more information.
Even though your vehicle is
equipped with TPMS, we
recommend that you visually check
your tires every day. If you think a
tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
07/07/25
15:15:19
Main Menu
31SWA610
0308
Table Of Contents
Tires
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
spare tire at the same time.
Recommended Tire Pressures
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Tire Size
225/65R17 102T
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front/Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 338 .
303
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on this page.
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
07/07/25
15:15:27
Main Menu
31SWA610
0309
Table Of Contents
Tires
Tire Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
You should look for:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the
tread. This shows there is less than
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
the tire.
304
2008 CR- V
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
07/07/25
15:15:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0310
Table Of Contents
Tires
Tire Service Life
The service life of your tires is
dependent on many factors,
including, but not limited to, driving
habits, road conditions, vehicle
loading, inflation pressure,
maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even
when the tires are not in use).
In addition to your regular
inspections and inflation pressure
maintenance, it is recommended that
you have annual inspections
performed once the tires reach five
years old. It is also recommended
that all tires, including the spare, be
removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture,
regardless of their condition or state
of wear.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
On vehicles with aluminum wheels,
improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights f or
balancing.
305
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
The last four digits of the TIN (tire
identification number) are found on
the sidewall of the tire and indicate
the date of manufacture (See Tire
Labeling on page 340 ).
Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
07/07/25
15:15:43
Main Menu
31SWA610
0311
Table Of Contents
Tires
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
diagram each time they are rotated.
If you purchase directional tires,
rotate only front-to-back.
When the tires are rotated, make
sure the air pressures are checked.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
306
2008 CR- V
Also be sure you use only TPMS
specific wheels. If you do not, the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not work on that tire.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
07/07/25
15:15:54
Main Menu
31SWA610
0312
Table Of Contents
Tires
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Winter Driving
Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an allweather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Tire Chains
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal linktype ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
Snow Tires
Wheels:
17 x 6 1/2J
Tires:
225/65R17 102T
See page 338 for DOT tire quality
grading information, and page
340 for tire size and labeling
information.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may be lower than your original tires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Maintenance
Wheel and Tire Specifications
CONTINUED
307
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:16:01
Main Menu
31SWA610
0313
Table Of Contents
Tires, Wheels, Checking the Battery
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Wheels
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
the same solution, and rinse them
thoroughly.
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
If equipped
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
308
2008 CR- V
Check the condition of the battery
monthly by looking at the test
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
07/07/25
15:16:07
Main Menu
31SWA610
0314
Table Of Contents
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected, or goes dead, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio, you
may see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the code (see page 218 ).
309
2008 CR- V
Maintenance
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative (−) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
07/07/25
15:16:17
Main Menu
31SWA610
0315
Table Of Contents
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
rag so they do not touch the
windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
310
2008 CR- V
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
07/07/25
15:16:21
31SWA610
0316
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 312
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 313
If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 318
Jump Starting ................................. 320
If the Engine Overheats ............... 322
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 324
Charging System Indicator........... 324
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 325
Brake System Indicator ................ 326
Fuses ............................................... 327
Fuse Locations ............................... 330
Emergency Towing ....................... 332
Taking Care of the Unexpected
311
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:16:29
Main Menu
31SWA610
0317
Table Of Contents
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
The low tire pressure indicator
comes on and stays on after you
replace the flat tire with the
compact spare tire. After several
miles (kilometers) driving with the
compact spare tire, the TPMS
indicator comes on and the low
tire pressure indicator goes off.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
312
2008 CR- V
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
07/07/25
15:16:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0318
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
SPARE TIRE
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
TOOLS
JACK
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
3. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo
area floor lid by lifting up with the
strap, and remove it from cargo
area by disengaging the tabs.
When you store the flat tire in the
spare tire well, do not reinstall the
cargo area floor lid forcibly. This
will damage the tabs on the lid.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
4. Take the tool kit out of the spare
tire.
CONTINUED
313
2008 CR- V
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
07/07/25
15:16:47
31SWA610
Main Menu
0319
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
JACKING POINT
JACK
5. Take the jack out of the spare tire
area.
7. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack by lifting it
straight up.
6. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
314
2008 CR- V
8. Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
07/07/25
15:16:55
Main Menu
31SWA610
0320
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
12. Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
13. Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
EXTENSION
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
10. Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
11. Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
driving.
CONTINUED
315
2008 CR- V
Taking Care of the Unexpected
9. Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
BRAKE HUB
07/07/25
15:17:04
31SWA610
Main Menu
0321
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
SPACER CONE
For spare For normal
tire
tire
TAB
14. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
15. Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire.
16. Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
17. Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
18. Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
316
2008 CR- V
To remove the spacer cone, squeeze
the tabs on the wing bolt to
disengage it from the center of the
spacer cone, then pull the bolt
downward.
To install the wing bolt to the spacer
cone, reverse this procedure.
07/07/25
15:17:10
Main Menu
31SWA610
0322
Table Of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
19.Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and place
the cover on the flat tire of the
cargo area.
22.Your vehicle’s original tire has a
tire pressure monitoring system
sensor. To replace a tire, refer to
Changing a Tire with TPMS (see
page 260 ).
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
20.Store the center cap in the spare
tire well. Make sure it does not get
scratched or damaged.
21.Close the tailgate.
317
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:17:18
Main Menu
31SWA610
0323
Table Of Contents
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 320 .
318
2008 CR- V
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
Emergency Towing on page 332 .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page 309 ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page 320 ).
07/07/25
15:17:25
Main Menu
31SWA610
0324
Table Of Contents
If the Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page 61 ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 327 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 332 .
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 246 .
319
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:17:33
Main Menu
31SWA610
0325
Table Of Contents
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
1. Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: heater, A/C, stereo system,
lights, etc. Put the transmission in
Park, and set the parking brake.
320
2008 CR- V
BOOSTER BATTERY
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
3. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive (+) terminal on the
booster battery.
07/07/25
15:17:39
Main Menu
31SWA610
0326
Table Of Contents
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
4. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the stud bolt on the
engine side as shown. Do not
connect this jumper cable to any
other part of the engine.
7. Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
321
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:17:46
Main Menu
31SWA610
0327
Table Of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
The reading of the vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange. If it climbs to the red
mark, you should determine the
reason (hot day, driving up a steep
hill, etc.).
If the vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
Driving with the temperature gauge
reading at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Park, and
set the parking brake. Turn off the
all accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
322
2008 CR- V
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge reading comes down to the
midpoint, then continue driving.
4. If the temperature gauge reading
stays at the red mark, turn off the
engine.
07/07/25
15:17:54
Main Menu
31SWA610
0328
Table Of Contents
If the Engine Overheats
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 332 ).
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
8. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
10. Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see Emergency
Towing on page 332 ).
11. If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
323
2008 CR- V
Taking Care of the Unexpected
7. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the reading
reaches the middle of the
temperature gauge or lower
before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
9. Start the engine, and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum heat. Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
07/07/25
15:18:03
Main Menu
31SWA610
0329
Table Of Contents
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the vehicle stopped.
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 230 ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 281 ).
4. Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
332 ).
324
2008 CR- V
Charging System
Indicator
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
07/07/25
15:18:10
Main Menu
31SWA610
0330
Table Of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
also come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
If the battery in your vehicle has
been disconnected or gone dead,
these codes may be erased. It can
take several days of driving under
various conditions to set the codes
again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks five times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for an emissions
test until the readiness codes are set.
Refer to Emissions Testing for
more information (see page 347 ).
Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
325
2008 CR- V
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until it
clicks at least once. Tightening the
cap will not turn the indicator off
immediately; it can take several days
of normal driving.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your dealer as soon as
possible.
07/07/25
15:18:17
Main Menu
31SWA610
0331
Table Of Contents
Brake System Indicator
U.S.
Canada
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
the next time you stop at a service
station (see page 289 ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see Emergency
Towing on page 332 ).
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
326
2008 CR- V
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
07/07/25
15:18:24
Main Menu
31SWA610
0332
Table Of Contents
Fuses
INTERIOR
FUSE
UNDER-HOOD
(PRIMARY)
TAB
FUSE LABEL
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
two fuse boxes.
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, check for a
blown fuse first. Determine from the
chart on pages 330 and 331 , or the
diagram on the fuse box lid, which
fuse or fuses control that device.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
The interior fuse box is located
under the dashboard on the driver’s
side. The fuse label is attached
under the steering column.
CONTINUED
327
2008 CR- V
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
07/07/25
15:18:31
Main Menu
31SWA610
0333
Table Of Contents
Fuses
FUSE
BLOWN
FUSE
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
1. Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the side window
at the wire inside. Removing these
fuses requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
328
2008 CR- V
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided on the back of the
under-hood fuse box cover.
07/07/25
15:18:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0334
Table Of Contents
Fuses
BLOWN
Your vehicle has spare fuses on
the back of the under-hood fuse
box cover.
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
may see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the digit code (see
page 218 ).
On vehicles with a navigation system,
touch the appropriate icon to enter
the code number (see page 218 ).
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
329
2008 CR- V
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5. Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sure you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
07/07/25
15:18:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0335
Table Of Contents
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7.5 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
(15 A)
(20 A)
−
10 A
7.5 A
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
20 A
15 A
Circuits Protected
Power Window Relay
Fuel Pump
ACG
ABS/VSA
Heated Seats*
Front Fog Lights*
Not used
Rear Wiper
ODS (Occupant Detection
System)
Meter
SRS
Right Headlight High Beam
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Light (Interior)
Small Light (Exterior)
Right Headlight Low Beam
Left Headlight Low Beam
Main Headlight High Beam
Small Lights MAIN
No. Amps.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
7.5 A
20 A
−
−
(20 A)
20 A
20 A
(20 A)
15 A
15 A
20 A
(15 A)
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
30 A
* : If equipped
330
2008 CR- V
Circuits Protected
TPMS
Headlight Low Beam
Not used
Not used
Moonroof *
Door Lock
Front Left Power Window
HAC Option
Rear Accessory Socket
Accessory
Front Right Power Window
Accessory Power Socket on
the Center Table*
Rear Right Power Window
Rear Left power window
ACC Radio
ACC Key lock
HAC
Daytime Running Lights
Front Wiper
07/07/25
15:18:52
Main Menu
31SWA610
0336
Table Of Contents
Fuse Locations
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1
2
3
4
Battery
EPS*
Option Main
Ignition Switch Main
ABS/VSA FSR
ABS/VSA Motor
Headlight Main
Power Window Main
EPT-R *
Sub Fan Motor
Main Fan Motor
Rear Defogger
Blower
Hazard
LAF
Stop and Horn
No. Amps.
13
(20 A)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
(20 A)
7.5 A
(30 A)
(15 A)
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
Circuits Protected
Power Seat DR RR HI/
Reclining*
Power Seat DR FR HI/Sliding*
IGPS OIL LEVEL
EPT-L *
High Power Sound*
IG Coil
FI Main
MG Clutch
DBW
Interior Light
Back Up
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
100 A
(70 A)
80 A
50 A
20 A
40 A
50 A
40 A
(30 A)
20 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
Circuits Protected
* : If equipped
331
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:18:58
Main Menu
31SWA610
0337
Table Of Contents
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Refer to Towing Your Vehicle
Behind a Motorhome on page
266 for non-emergency towing
information.
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment. The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
On 4WD models
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the 4WD
system. It should be transported on a
f lat-bed truck or trailer.
332
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:19:02
31SWA610
0338
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 334
Specifications ................................. 336
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 338
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ................................... 338
Treadwear .................................. 338
Traction....................................... 338
Temperature .............................. 339
Tire Labeling .................................. 340
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) − Required Federal
Explanation............................. 342
333
2008 CR- V
Technical Information
Emissions Controls........................ 344
The Clean Air Act ...................... 344
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 344
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 344
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 344
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 345
PGM-FI System ..................... 345
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 345
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 345
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 345
Replacement Parts..................... 345
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 346
Emissions Testing ......................... 347
07/07/25
15:19:07
Main Menu
31SWA610
0339
Table Of Contents
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
To access the VIN in the engine
compartment, pull down the lid on
the back of the engine compartment.
Make sure to close the lid before
closing the hood.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
334
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:19:12
Main Menu
31SWA610
0340
Table Of Contents
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into
the front of the engine block.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
You can see the engine number
through the window next to the ‘‘H’’
logo.
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
Technical Information
ENGINE NUMBER
335
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:19:28
Main Menu
31SWA610
0341
Table Of Contents
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Capacities
Fuel tank
Engine oil
177.9 in (4,518 mm)
71.6 in (1,820 mm)
66.1 in (1,680 mm)
103.1 in (2,620 mm)
61.6 in (1,565 mm)
61.6 in (1,565 mm)
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC
i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
9.7 : 1
IZFR6K-11 (NGK)
SKJ20DR-M11 (DENSO)
Capacities
Engine
Change*2
coolant
Total
Automatic
Change
4WD
transmission
fluid
2WD
Total
4WD
2WD
Rear
Change
differential
Total
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
U.S. Vehicles
washer
Canada
Vehicles
reservoir
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
2.7 US qt (2.6 )
7.6 US qt (7.2
7.4 US qt (7.0
1.3 US qt (1.2
1.5 US qt (1.4
)
)
)
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
*1 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
*2 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
Approx.
15.3 US gal (58 )
Change*1
Including filter
Without filter
Total
1.32 US gal (5.0 )
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
336
2008 CR- V
07/07/26
17:11:20
Main Menu
31SWA610
0342
Table Of Contents
Specifications
Seating Capacities
Total
Front
Rear
Fuses
Interior
5
2
3
See page 330 or the fuse label
attached under the steering
column.
See page 331 or the fuse box
cover.
Under-hood
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Battery
Capacity
Alignment
Toe-in
Camber
12 V − 50/55 W (HB2)
12 V − 21 W (Amber)
12 V − 3 CP
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
21 W (Amber)
21/5 W
21 W
5W
8W
8W
8W
5W
21 W
Caster
Tires
Size
Pressure
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
0.0 in (0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−1°00’
1°45’
225/65R17 102T
T155/90D17 101M
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Technical Information
Lights
Headlights
High/Low
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights/side marker
lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Cargo area light
Rear side marker lights
High-mount brake light
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.5−17.3 oz (440−490 g)
SP-10
12 V − 36 AH/5 HR
12 V − 47 AH/20 HR
337
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:20:01
Main Menu
31SWA610
0343
Table Of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
338
2008 CR- V
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
07/07/25
15:20:05
Main Menu
31SWA610
0344
Table Of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
Technical Information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
339
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:20:18
Main Menu
31SWA610
0345
Table Of Contents
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Below is an example of
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
(1)
102 − Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
T
− Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
225/65R17 102T
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
225 − Tire width in millimeters.
65 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
R
(1)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(3)
− Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
17 − Rim diameter in inches.
(2)
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example.
TIN is located on the sidewall of the
tire.
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
DOT − This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
340
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:20:26
Main Menu
31SWA610
0346
Table Of Contents
Tire Labeling
FW6X − Tire type code.
2202
− Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
Maximum Tire Pressure
Max Press − The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
Maximum Tire Load
Max Load − The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Technical Information
341
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:20:32
Main Menu
31SWA610
0347
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
342
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:20:37
Main Menu
31SWA610
0348
Table Of Contents
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
Technical Information
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
343
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:20:45
Main Menu
31SWA610
0349
Table Of Contents
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several byproducts. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Controlling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contribute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
*
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
344
2008 CR- V
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
07/07/25
15:20:55
Main Menu
31SWA610
0350
Table Of Contents
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
345
2008 CR- V
Technical Information
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
quality parts may increase the
emissions from your vehicle.
07/07/25
15:21:01
Main Menu
31SWA610
0351
Table Of Contents
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
346
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:21:09
Main Menu
31SWA610
0352
Table Of Contents
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for an
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
6. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, let the engine idle for 20
seconds.
2. Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
CONTINUED
347
2008 CR- V
Technical Information
3. Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F (4° and 35°C).
07/07/25
15:21:14
Main Menu
31SWA610
0353
Table Of Contents
Emissions Testing
7. Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
8. Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
9. Stop the vehicle, turn off the
ignition switch, and leave it off for
30 minutes.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
348
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:21:17
31SWA610
0354
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
349
2008 CR- V
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 350
Warranty Coverages ..................... 351
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 352
Authorized Manuals ...................... 353
07/07/25
15:21:25
Main Menu
31SWA610
0355
Table Of Contents
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
Canadian Owners:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Mileage on your vehicle
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Your name, address, and telephone number
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Customer Relations
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 334 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
A detailed description of the
problem
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Tel: (800) 999-1009
350
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:21:34
Main Menu
31SWA610
0356
Table Of Contents
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100% credit toward a replacement
battery.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2008 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2008 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
351
2008 CR- V
Warranty and Customer Relations
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
07/07/25
15:21:38
Main Menu
31SWA610
0357
Table Of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
352
2008 CR- V
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.saf ercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC
20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.saf ercar.gov.
07/07/25
15:21:46
31SWA610
0358
Main Menu
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)
Go online at www. helminc. com
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61SWA01
61SWA01EL
31SWAM10
31SWAQ10
HON-R
2008 Honda CR-V Service Manual
2008 Honda CR-V
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2007 Honda CR-V Body Repair Manual
2008 Honda CR-V Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda CR-V
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2008 Honda CR-V Honda Service History
2008 Honda CR-V Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate
Year and Model Desired
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth
troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit
in your vehicle.
Body Repair Manual:
Describes the procedures involved in the replacement
of damaged body parts.
353
2008 CR- V
Authorized Manuals
62SWA30
31SWA610
31SWA810
Form Description
Service Manual:
Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for
repair to engine and chassis components. It is written
for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough
for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.
07/07/25
15:21:49
31SWA610
0359
Main Menu
354
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:21:54
31SWA610
0360
Main Menu
Index
A
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 60, 324
Jump Starting ............................. 320
Maintenance ............................... 309
Specifications ............................. 337
Before Driving ............................... 225
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 18
Beverage Holders .......................... 116
Booster Seats ................................... 51
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 254
Break-in, New Linings .............. 226
Bulb Replacement ..................... 291
Fluid ............................................ 289
Parking .......................................... 78
System Indicator .................. 60, 326
System Design ........................... 253
Wear Indicators ......................... 253
Braking System.............................. 253
Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 226
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 76
Brights, Headlights ................... 74, 75
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 295
Brake Lights............................... 295
Front Parking Lights ................. 294
Front Side Marker Lights......... 294
Headlights .................................. 291
High-mount Brake Light .......... 296
Rear Side Marker Lights .......... 295
Specifications ............................. 337
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 293
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 291
INDEX
Accessories..................................... 234
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 81
Accessory Power Sockets............. 120
Active Head Restraint ................... 100
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 282
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ........ 78
Advanced Airbags............................ 27
Airbag (SRS) ................................ 9, 22
Air Conditioning System ............... 126
Usage .......................................... 127
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 303
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 226
Antifreeze ....................................... 284
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 61, 254
Operation .................................... 254
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 218
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 81
Audio System ................................. 139
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 83
Automatic Climate Control........... 132
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 20
Automatic Speed Control.............. 222
Automatic Transmission............... 247
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 336
Checking Fluid Level ................ 287
D3 Mode ...................................... 249
Shifting ........................................ 247
Shift Lever Position
Indicators ................................ 247
Shift Lever Positions ................. 248
Shift Lock Release ..................... 251
Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 217
CONTINUED
I
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:21:59
31SWA610
0361
Main Menu
Index
C
Capacities Chart............................. 336
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54
Cargo ............................................... 236
Cargo area Light ............................ 124
Cargo Hooks .................................. 241
Carrying Cargo .............................. 236
Cargo, How to Carry ..................... 236
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii
CD Care .......................................... 213
CD Changer ........................... 162, 191
CD Changer Error
Messages ............................ 169, 197
CD Error Messages .............. 169, 197
CD Player ............................... 145, 182
Center Pocket ................................ 113
Center Table................................... 117
Certification Label ......................... 334
Chains, Tires .................................. 307
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 313
Changing Oil .................................. 281
How to ......................................... 281
When to....................................... 279
Charging System Message..... 60, 324
Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............. 228
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 245
Child Safety ...................................... 34
Booster Seats ............................... 51
Child Seats .............................. 34, 39
Important Safety Reminders ...... 34
Infants ........................................... 39
Larger Children ........................... 50
LATCH.......................................... 43
Risks with Airbags....................... 35
Small Children.............................. 40
Tethers.......................................... 48
Warning Labels ............................ 36
Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 35
Child Seats .................................. 34, 39
LATCH.......................................... 43
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 48
Childproof Door Locks ................... 88
Cleaning Seat Belts........................ 297
Climate Control System ................ 132
Clock ............................................... 219
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 344
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 246
Consumer Information*................ 350
Controls, Instruments and .............. 57
Conversation Mirror ..................... 120
II
2008 CR- V
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 284
Checking ..................................... 230
Proper Solution .......................... 284
Temperature Gauge .................... 69
Courtesy Light ............................... 124
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 344
Cruise Control Indicator ................. 62
Cruise Control Operation ............. 222
Customer Service Office .............. 350
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Dashboard .................................... 4, 72
Daytime Running Lights................. 75
Daytime Running Lights
Indicator ........................................ 63
Dead Battery .................................. 320
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 352
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 77
Defrosting the Windows ............... 130
Detachable Anchor........................ 107
Dimensions ..................................... 336
Dimming the Headlights .......... 74, 75
07/07/25
15:22:04
31SWA610
0362
Main Menu
Index
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 287
Engine Oil ................................... 230
Directional Signals ........................... 74
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 253
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 283
Doors
Auto Door Lock ........................... 84
Auto Door Unlock........................ 86
Childproof Door Locks ............... 88
Locking and Unlocking ............... 83
Power Door Locks ....................... 82
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 338
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 243
Economy ..................................... 231
Driving Guidelines ......................... 244
D3 Mode .......................................... 249
Dual Button .................................... 133
Dual Deck Cargo Shelf ................. 114
Dual Temperature Control ........... 136
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 298
Economy, Fuel ............................... 231
Specifications ............................. 336
Speed Limiter ............................. 250
Starting........................................ 246
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 226
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 344
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 54
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 16
F
Fan, Interior.................................... 127
Features .......................................... 125
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 227
Filters
Dust and Pollen .......................... 298
Oil ................................................ 282
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 76
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 313
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 287
Brake ........................................... 289
Power Steering........................... 290
Windshield Washer ................... 286
CONTINUED
III
2008 CR- V
INDEX
E
Emergencies................................... 311
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 320
Brake System Indicator ............ 326
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 313
Charging System Indicator ...... 324
Checking the Fuses................... 327
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 76
Jump Starting ............................. 320
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 324
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 325
Overheated Engine ................... 322
Towing ........................................ 332
Emergency Brake ............................ 78
Emergency Flashers ....................... 76
Emergency Towing ....................... 332
Emissions Controls........................ 344
Emissions Testing ......................... 347
Engine
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 284
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 69
If It Won’t Start .......................... 318
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 60, 325
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 60, 324
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 281
Overheating................................ 322
07/07/25
15:22:10
31SWA610
0363
Main Menu
Index
Folding Rear Seat .................. 102, 104
Four-way Flashers ........................... 76
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 25
Front Seat
Adjusting ....................................... 95
Heaters........................................ 108
Airbags ...................................... 9, 25
Fuel .................................................. 226
Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 228
Fill Door and Cap....................... 227
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 63
Gauge ............................................ 66
Octane Requirement ................. 226
Oxygenated ................................ 226
Tank, Refueling ......................... 227
Fuel Economy ................................ 231
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 327
G
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 232
Gasohol ........................................... 226
Gasoline .......................................... 226
Low Fuel Indicator ...................... 63
Gauge ............................................ 69
Octane Requirement ................. 226
Tank, Refueling ......................... 227
Gas Station Procedures................. 227
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 69
Fuel ................................................ 69
Gearshift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........... 247
Glove Box ....................................... 117
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) .............................. 262, 336
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 291
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 76
Headlights
Aiming ......................................... 291
Daytime Running Lights............. 75
High Beam Indicator ................... 63
Reminder Chime .......................... 75
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 291
Turning on .................................... 74
Head Restraints ............................... 98
Heated Mirrors .............................. 112
Heater, Seat .................................... 108
Heating and Cooling ...................... 126
IV
2008 CR- V
High Beam Lever............................. 74
Hood, Opening the ........................ 229
Horn............................................... 4, 72
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 334
Ignition
Keys............................................... 79
Switch ............................................ 81
Timing Control System ............. 345
Immobilizer System......................... 80
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
07/07/25
15:22:16
31SWA610
0364
Main Menu
Index
Infant Restraint ................................ 39
Infant Seats ....................................... 39
Tether Anchorage Point ............. 48
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 302
Recommended Pressures ......... 303
Inside Mirror .................................. 111
Inspection, Tire .............................. 304
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 42
Instrument Panel ............................. 59
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76
Instruments and Controls ............... 57
Interior Lights ................................ 122
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 314
Jack, Tire ........................................ 315
Jump Starting ................................. 320
K
Keys ................................................... 79
L
Label, Certification ........................ 334
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 74
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
LATCH Anchorage System............ 43
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 291
Indicator ........................................ 64
Parking .......................................... 74
Turn Signal ................................... 74
Load Limits..................................... 237
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 81
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 81
Childproof Door ........................... 88
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 227
Glove Box ........................... 117, 118
Power Door .................................. 82
Tailgate ......................................... 92
Low Coolant Level ......................... 230
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 63
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 60, 324
Lower Anchors................................. 43
CONTINUED
V
2008 CR- V
INDEX
Indicators
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake)....... 61, 254
Brake (Parking and Brake
System) ............................. 60, 326
Charging System ................. 60, 324
Cruise Control .............................. 62
DRL (Daytime Running
Lights)....................................... 63
High Beam .................................... 63
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 61
Low Fuel ....................................... 63
Low Oil Pressure ................. 60, 324
Low Tire Pressure ............... 64, 258
Maintenance Minder........... 65, 273
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 60, 325
Passenger Airbag Off .................. 32
Side Airbag Off ............................ 61
SRS ................................................ 61
TPMS .................................... 64, 259
Turn Signal and Hazard
Warning .................................... 63
VSA (Vehicle Stability
Assist) ............................... 62, 256
Washer Level ............................... 65
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 59
07/07/25
15:22:22
31SWA610
0365
Main Menu
Index
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 336
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 236
Luggage Net (Cargo Net) ............ 241
M
Maintenance ................................... 271
Minder ................................. 273-279
Main Items and Sub Items ....... 276
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks .................................... 278
Minder Indicator .......................... 65
Safety........................................... 272
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 60, 325
Meters, Gauges.......................... 59, 66
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 226
Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 111
Modifying Your Vehicle................ 235
Moonroof ........................................ 110
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 249
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 226
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 334
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 226
Odometer .......................................... 69
Odometer, Trip ................................ 67
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 268
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 282
Change, When to ....................... 279
Checking Engine ....................... 230
Pressure Indicator ............... 60, 324
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 281
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 81
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 344
Outside Mirrors ............................. 112
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 69
Overheating, Engine ..................... 322
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 278
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 226
P
Panel Brightness Control ............... 76
Park Gear Position......................... 248
VI
2008 CR- V
Parking ............................................ 252
Parking Brake .................................. 78
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 60, 326
Parking Lights.................................. 74
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 252
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ..... 32
PC card............................................ 198
PC card Error Messages .............. 210
PGM-FI System.............................. 345
Pollen Filter .................................... 298
Power Door Locks ........................... 82
Power Seats ...................................... 94
Power Socket Locations................ 120
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 290
Power Windows ............................. 109
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16
Preparing to Drive ......................... 245
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
07/07/25
15:22:28
31SWA610
0366
Main Menu
Index
Protecting Children ......................... 34
Protecting Infants ........................ 39
Protecting Larger Children ........ 50
Protecting Small Children .......... 40
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 48
Using LATCH .............................. 43
Protecting Your Discs ................... 213
R
S
Safety Belts................................... 8, 18
Safety Defects, Reporting .......... 352
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 55
Safety Messages ............................... iii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Additional Information ................ 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 20
Cleaning ...................................... 297
Detachable Anchor.................... 107
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19
Maintenance ................................. 20
Reminder Indicator and
Beeper ....................................... 60
System Components.................... 18
Use During Pregnancy................ 16
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 14
Seat Heaters ................................... 108
Seat Power Adjustment................... 94
Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 95
Select/Reset Button ........................ 66
Serial Number ................................ 334
Service Intervals ............................ 279
Service Manual ............................ 353
Service Station Procedures .......... 227
CONTINUED
VII
2008 CR- V
INDEX
Radiator Overheating .................... 322
Radio/CD Sound System .............. 139
Radio Theft Protection.................. 218
Readiness Codes ............................ 325
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 289
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 295
Rear Seat, Folding ................. 102, 104
Rear View Mirror........................... 111
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 74
Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 95
Refueling ......................................... 227
Reminder Indicators ........................ 59
Remote Transmitter ........................ 89
Replacement Information
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 298
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 282
Fuses ........................................... 327
Light Bulbs ................................. 291
Schedule ..................................... 279
Tires ............................................ 302
Wiper Blades .............................. 299
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 21
Reporting Safety Defects* ........... 352
Reserve Tank, Engine
Coolant ................................ 230, 284
Restraint, Child ................................ 34
Reverse Gear Position................... 248
Reverse Lockout ............................ 251
Roof Rack ....................................... 239
Rotation, Tire ................................. 306
07/07/25
15:22:32
31SWA610
0367
Main Menu
Index
Setting the Clock ........................... 219
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 247
Shift Lock Release ......................... 251
Side Airbags ................................. 9, 28
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 31
Side Curtain Airbags ................... 9, 30
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 30
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 294
Signaling Turns ................................ 74
Snow Tires ...................................... 307
Sound System ................................. 139
Spare Tire ....................................... 312
Spark Plugs ..................................... 336
Specifications ......................... 336, 337
Speed Control ................................. 222
Speed Limiter ................................. 250
SRS, Additional Information........... 22
Additional Safety Precautions .... 33
Airbag Service .............................. 33
Airbag System Components ....... 22
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works ....................... 31
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 31
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 25
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 28
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work.......................................... 30
SRS Indicator.............................. 31, 61
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 81
Starting the Engine........................ 246
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 246
With a Dead Battery ................. 318
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 322
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 78
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 81
Steering Wheel Buttons........ 216, 222
Stereo Sound System .................... 139
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 310
Sun Visor......................................... 119
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 119
Supplemental Restraint
System................................... 9, 22
Servicing ....................................... 33
SRS Indicator.......................... 31, 61
System Components.................... 22
VIII
2008 CR- V
Synthetic Oil ................................... 282
T
Table
Center ......................................... 117
Tailgate
Open Indicator ............................. 63
Opening the .................................. 92
Taillights, Changing Bulbs ........... 295
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 311
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading* ..... 338
Emissions Control Systems ...... 344
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 226
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 346
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)−Required Federal
Explanation............................. 343
Temperature Gauge ........................ 69
Temperature, Outside ..................... 69
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 48
Theft Protection, Radio................. 218
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 346
Tilt the Steering Wheel................... 78
07/07/25
15:22:38
31SWA610
0368
Main Menu
Index
Pre-Tow Checklist ..................... 264
Weight Limit .............................. 261
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) ................................... 258
Indicator ................................ 64, 258
Required Federal
Explanation............................. 342
Trailer Loading ...................... 261, 262
Trailer Towing Tips....................... 264
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 287
Fluid Selection............................ 287
Identification Number............... 334
Shifting the Automatic .............. 247
Treadwear ...................................... 338
Trip Meter ........................................ 67
Turn Signals ..................................... 74
U
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 311
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 338
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 226
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 283
V
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 237
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 336
Vehicle Identification Number..... 334
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 256
Indicators ...................................... 62
Vehicle Storage .............................. 310
Ventilation ...................................... 128
VIN .................................................. 334
Viscosity, Oil................................... 281
W
WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 55
Warranty Coverages* ................... 351
Washers, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 286
Operation ...................................... 73
INDEX
Time, Setting the ........................... 219
Tire Chains ..................................... 307
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 313
Tire Information ............................ 338
Tires ................................................ 302
Air Pressure ............................... 303
Chains ......................................... 307
Checking Wear .......................... 304
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 338
Inflation ....................................... 302
Inspection ................................... 304
Labeling ...................................... 340
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator............................ 64, 258
Maintenance ............................... 305
Pressure Monitoring System ... 259
Replacing .................................... 306
Rotating....................................... 306
Snow ............................................ 307
Specifications ............................. 337
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 313
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 261
Behind a Motorhome ................ 266
Emergency Wrecker ................. 332
Equipment and Accessories ..... 263
CONTINUED
IX
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:22:42
31SWA610
0369
Main Menu
Index
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 78
Alignment and Balance ............. 306
Wrench, Nut ............................... 314
Windows
Auto Reverse .............................. 109
Operating the Power ................. 109
Rear, Defogger ............................ 77
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 73
Defroster .................................... 130
Washers ...................................... 286
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 299
Operation ...................................... 73
Worn Tires ..................................... 304
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 332
*
: U.S. only
X
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:22:44
31SWA610
0370
Main Menu
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:22:47
31SWA610
0371
Main Menu
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:22:49
31SWA610
0372
Main Menu
2008 CR- V
07/07/25
15:23:03
31SWA610
0373
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
15.3 US gal (58 )
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 281 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
On 4WD model only
Rear Differential Fluid:
Honda Dual Pump Fluid II. Do not
use ATF.
Capacity:
1.3 US qt (1.2 )
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 290 ).
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) (see page
287 ).
2008 CR- V
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 289 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Compact Spare Tire:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
07/07/25
14:32:53
31SWA610
0001
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
OWNER
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the CR-V. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular vehicle.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
2008 CR- V
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SWAC10
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement